Manual Lexus IS 220d - 2005-2013 (page 2 of 609) (English)

810972

Zoom out

Zoom in

1/609

TABLE OF CONTENTS

IS250/220d/200d_EE

1Before driving Adjusting and operating features such as door locks,

mirrors, and steering column.

2When driving Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.

3Interior features Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other in-

terior features for a comfortable driving experience.

4Maintenance and

care Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-

yourself maintenance, and maintenance information.

5When trouble

arises What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat

tire, or is involved in an accident.

6Vehicle specifica-

tions Detailed vehicle information.

Index Alphabetical listing of information contained in this

manual.

TABLE OF CONTENTS Index

IS250/220d/200d_EE

1-1. Key information

Keys ..................................... 32

1-2. Opening, closing and

locking the doors and trunk

Smart entry & start system... 37

Wireless remote control ....... 52

Doors.................................... 54

Trunk.................................... 59

1-3. Adjustable components

(seats, mirrors,

steering wheel)

Front seats ............................ 63

Driving position memory..... 65

Head restraints...................... 69

Seat belts .............................. 72

Steering wheel

(manually adjustable type). 77

Steering wheel

(power-adjustable type) ..... 78

Anti-glare inside rear

view mirror......................... 80

Outside rear view mirrors .... 82

1-4. Opening and closing the

windows and moon roof

Power windows.................... 85

Moon roof ............................ 88

1-5. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap .... 92

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system.. 96

Double locking system....... 101

Alarm ................................. 102

1-7. Safety information

Correct driving posture ...... 108

SRS airbags........................ 110

Child restraint systems....... 121

Installing child restraints.... 129

Airbag manual on/off

system .............................. 139

1Before driving

For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System

Owner’s Manual” for information regarding the equipment listed below.

• Navigation system

• Air conditioning

• Climate control

• Lexus parking assist-sensor

• Audio/video system

• Rear window and outside rear

view mirror defogging

IS250/220d/200d_EE

2-1. Driving procedures

Driving the vehicle............. 142

Engine (ignition) switch..... 153

Automatic transmission...... 158

Manual transmission .......... 165

Turn signal lever ................ 167

Parking brake ..................... 168

Horn ................................... 170

2-2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters............. 171

Indicators and warning lights....

177

Multi-information display.. 181

2-3. Operating the lights and

windshield wipers

Headlight switch ................ 186

Fog light switch.................. 190

Windshield wipers and

washer .............................. 191

Headlight cleaner switch.... 197

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruise control..................... 198

Dynamic radar cruise

control .............................. 202

Lexus parking assist-sensor 217

Driving assist systems........ 223

PCS (Pre-Crash Safety

system)............................. 229

2-5. Driving information

Cargo and luggage ............. 237

Winter driving tips ............. 239

Trailer towing..................... 242

3-1. Using the air conditioning

system and defogger

Automatic air

conditioning system ......... 254

Power heater....................... 262

Rear window and outside

rear view mirror

defoggers.......................... 264

Windshield wiper de-icer... 265

2When driving

3Interior features

TABLE OF CONTENTS Index

IS250/220d/200d_EE

3-2. Using the audio system

Audio system types............ 266

Using the radio................... 269

Using the CD player........... 273

Playing back MP3 and

WMA discs ...................... 280

Operating an iPod............... 287

Operating a USB memory.. 294

Optimal use of the audio

system .............................. 302

Using the AUX port........... 304

Using the steering wheel

audio switches.................. 305

3-3. Using the Bluetooth®

audio system

Bluetooth® audio system ... 308

Using the Bluetooth®

audio system .................... 313

Operating a Bluetooth®

enabled portable player.... 316

Setting up a Bluetooth®

enabled portable player.... 319

Bluetooth® audio system

setup................................. 322

3-4. Using the hands-free phone

system (for mobile phones)

Hands-free system for

mobile phones.................. 323

Using the hands-free system

(for mobile phones).......... 330

Making a phone call........... 336

Setting a mobile phone....... 340

Security and system setup.. 343

Using the phone book ........ 347

3-5. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list................ 351

• Interior lights.................... 353

• Personal lights.................. 354

3-6. Using the storage features

List of storage features....... 355

• Glove box......................... 356

• Console boxes .................. 356

• Overhead console............. 358

• Cup holders...................... 359

• Bottle holders/door

pockets ............................. 360

• Auxiliary box ................... 361

IS250/220d/200d_EE

3-7. Other interior features

Sun visors........................... 362

Vanity mirrors.................... 363

Clock.................................. 364

Satellite switches................ 365

Ashtrays ............................. 368

Cigarette lighter.................. 369

Power outlet ....................... 370

Seat heaters ........................ 371

Seat heaters and ventilators 374

Armrest............................... 377

Rear sunshade .................... 378

Trunk storage extension..... 380

Coat hooks.......................... 381

Floor mat............................ 382

Trunk features .................... 383

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle exterior........... 388

Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle interior ........... 392

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements . 395

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service

precautions....................... 398

Hood................................... 401

Positioning a floor jack ...... 402

Engine compartment .......... 404

Tires ................................... 420

Tire inflation pressure ........ 424

Wheels................................ 426

Air conditioning filter ........ 428

Electronic key battery ........ 431

Checking and replacing

fuses ................................. 433

Light bulbs ......................... 448

5-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers............ 458

If your vehicle needs to

be towed........................... 459

If you think something is

wrong ............................... 465

Fuel pump shut off system. 466

4Maintenance and care

5When trouble arises

TABLE OF CONTENTS Index

IS250/220d/200d_EE

5-2. Steps to take in an

emergency

If a warning light turns on

or a warning buzzer

sounds... .......................... 467

If a warning message is

displayed .......................... 473

If you have a flat tire

(vehicles with a spare tire) 485

If you have a flat tire

(vehicles with an

emergency tire

puncture repair kit)........... 497

If the engine will not start.. 512

If the shift lever cannot

be shifted from P.............. 514

If you lose your keys.......... 515

If the electronic key does

not operate properly......... 516

If the vehicle battery is

discharged ........................ 521

If your vehicle overheats.... 525

If you run out of fuel and

the engine stalls................ 528

If the vehicle becomes stuck.....

529

If your vehicle has to be

stopped in an emergency.. 531

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data

(fuel, oil level, etc.).......... 534

Fuel information................. 553

6-2. Customization

Customizable features........ 556

Abbreviation list ......................... 562

Alphabetical index...................... 563

What to do if... ........................... 574

6Vehicle specifications

Index

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Pictorial index Exterior

Headlights

Turn signal lights

Front position lights

P. 186

P. 167

P. 186

Fog lights

P. 190

Turn signal lights

P. 167

Hood

P. 401

Windshield wipers

P. 191

Moon roof 

P. 88

Outside rear view

mirrors

P. 82

Daytime running lights



P. 188

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Tires

Rotation

Replacement

Inflation pressure

P. 420

P. 485, 497

P. 548

Tail lights

P. 186

Rear window defogger

P. 264

Trunk

P. 59

Doors

P. 54

Fuel filler door

P. 92

Fog lights

P. 190

Turn signal lights

P. 167

: If equipped

*1: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Bottle holders/door pockets

P. 360

SRS knee airbags

P. 110

Power window

switches

P. 85

Pictorial index Interior

(Left-hand drive vehicles)

Seat belts

P. 72

SRS front

passenger air-

bag

P. 110

SRS driver airbag

P. 110

Floor mat

P. 382

Head restraints

P. 69

Front seats

P. 63

Cup holders

P. 359

SRS side airbags

P. 110

Console box

P. 356

Power outlet

P. 370

Ashtray 

P. 368

Cup holders

P. 359

Armrest

Console box 

P. 377

P. 356

AUX port

USB port

P. 304

P. 287, 294

IS250/220d/200d_EE

: If

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror

P. 80

Personal lights

P. 354

Moon roof switches 

P. 88

Interior lights

P. 353

Vanity mirrors

P. 363

Personal lights

P. 354

Interior lights

P. 353

Sun visors

P. 362

Coat hooks

P. 381

SRS curtain shield airbags

P. 110

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Driving position memory switches 

P. 65

Door lock switch

P. 54

Outside rear view

mirror switches

P. 82

Window lock switch

P. 85

Power window switches

P. 85

Pictorial index Interior

(Left-hand drive vehicles)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Automatic transmission

Manual transmission

Seat heater switches 

Seat heater/ventilator switches 

P. 371

P. 374

Automatic transmission shift lever

P. 158

Shift lock override button

P. 514

Cigarette lighter 

Ashtray 

Auxiliary box 

P. 369

P. 368

P. 361

Manual transmission shift lever

P. 165

Parking brake lever

P. 168

Cigarette lighter 

Ashtray 

Auxiliary box 

P. 369

P. 368

P. 361

Seat heater switches 

Seat heater/ventilator switches 

P. 371

P. 374

: If

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Pictorial index Instrument panel

(Left-hand drive vehicles)

Headlight switch

Turn signal lever

Fog light switch

P. 186

P. 167

P. 190

Shift paddle switches 

P. 160, 162

Gauges and meters

P. 171

Multi-information display

P. 181

Windshield wiper and washer switch

P. 191

Trunk opener main switch

P. 60

Glove box

P. 356

Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever 

P. 77

Tilt and telescopic steering control switch 

P. 78

Parking brake pedal (automatic transmission)

P. 168

Audio remote control switches *1

P. 305

Engine (ignition) switch

P. 153

Horn

P. 170

Hood release lever

P. 401

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Audio

system*2

Without navigation system

Navigation

system*2

Clock

P. 364

Audio

system

P. 266

Air conditioning

system

P. 254

Rear window and

outside rear view

mirror defoggers

switch

P. 264

Security indica-

tor

P. 96, 102

Emergency flasher

switch

P. 458

Clock

P. 364

Security indica-

tor

P. 96, 102

Rear window and out-

side rear view mirror

defoggers switch*2

Emergency flasher

switch

P. 458

Air conditioning

system*2

With navigation system

: If equipped

*1: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s

Manual”.

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Pictorial index Instrument panel

(Left-hand drive vehicles)

Telephone switch *1

P. 331

Cruise control switch 

Dynamic radar cruise control switch 

P. 198

P. 202

Distance switch 

P. 202

“DISP” switch

P. 182

Talk switch

P. 331

ECT switch (automatic transmission)

P. 159

Windshield wiper de-icer switch 

P. 265

IS250/220d/200d_EE

: If equipped

*1: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s

Rear sunshade switch 

P. 378

Fuel filler door opener

P. 92

Headlight cleaner switch 

P. 197

Satellite switches

P. 365

Instrument panel light control dial

P. 172

VSC off switch

P. 224

Trunk opener

P. 59

Manual headlight leveling dial 

P. 187

Type A

Type B Rear sunshade switch 

P. 378

Fuel filler door opener

P. 92

Trunk opener

P. 59

Headlight cleaner switch 

P. 197

Satellite switches

P. 365

Instrument panel light control

dial

P. 172

VSC off switch

P. 224

Power heater switch 

P. 262

Manual headlight leveling dial 

P. 187

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Power window

switches

P. 85

Pictorial index Interior

(Right-hand drive vehicles)

Seat belts

P. 72

SRS front

passenger

airbag

P. 110

SRS knee airbags

P. 110

SRS driver airbag

P. 110

Floor mat

P. 382

Bottle holders/

door pockets

P. 360

Head restraints

P. 69

Front seats

P. 63

Cup holders

P. 359

SRS side airbags

P. 110

Console box

P. 356

Power outlet

P. 370

Ashtray 

P. 368

Cup holders

P. 359

Armrest

Console box 

P. 377

P. 356

AUX port

USB port

P. 304

P. 287, 294

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror

P. 80

Personal lights

P. 354

Moon roof switches 

P. 88

Interior lights

P. 353

Vanity mirrors

P. 363

Personal lights

P. 354

Interior lights

P. 353

Sun visors

P. 362

Coat hooks

P. 381

SRS curtain shield airbags

P. 110

: If

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Driving position memory switches 

P. 65

Door lock switch

P. 54

Outside rear view mirror

switches

P. 82

Window lock switch

P. 85

Power window switches

P. 85

Pictorial index Interior

(Right-hand drive vehicles)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Automatic transmission

Manual transmission

Seat heater switches 

Seat heater/ventilator switches 

P. 371

P. 374

Automatic transmission shift lever

P. 158

Shift lock override button

P. 514

Cigarette lighter 

Ashtray 

Auxiliary box 

P. 369

P. 368

P. 361

Manual transmission shift lever

P. 165

Parking brake lever

P. 168

Cigarette lighter 

Ashtray 

Auxiliary box 

P. 369

P. 368

P. 361

Seat heater switches 

Seat heater/ventilator switches 

P. 371

P. 374

: If

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Pictorial index Instrument panel

(Right-hand drive vehicles)

Shift paddle switches 

P. 160, 162

Gauges and meters

P. 171

Multi-information display

P. 181

Windshield wiper

and washer switch

P. 191

Engine (ignition) switch

P. 153

Trunk opener

main switch

P. 60

Glove box

P. 356

Tilt and telescopic steering

lock release lever 

P. 77

Tilt and telescopic

steering control switch 

P. 78

Audio remote control switches

P. 305

Parking brake pedal

(automatic transmission)

P. 168

Horn

P. 170

Hood release lever

P. 401

Headlight switch

Turn signal lever

Fog light switch

P. 186

P. 167

P. 190

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Navigation

system*2

Without navigation system

Clock

P. 364

Audio

system

P. 266

Air condition-

ing system

P. 254

Rear window and

outside rear view

mirror defoggers

switch

P. 264

Security indica-

tor

P. 96, 102

Emergency flasher

switch

P. 458

Clock

P. 364

Audio

system*2

Security indicator

P. 96, 102

Emergency flasher

switch

P. 458

Air conditioning

system*2

With navigation system

: If equipped

*1: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s

Manual”.

Rear window and out-

side rear view mirror

defoggers switch*2

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Pictorial index Instrument panel

(Right-hand drive vehicles)

ECT switch (automatic transmission)

P. 159

Telephone switch *1

P. 331

Talk switch *1

P. 331

Distance switch 

P. 202

“DISP” switch

P. 182

Cruise control switch 

Dynamic radar cruise control switch 

P. 198

P. 202

IS250/220d/200d_EE

: If equipped

*1: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s

Trunk opener

P. 59

Headlight cleaner switch 

P. 197

Satellite switches

P. 365

Rear sunshade switch 

P. 378

Fuel filler door opener

P. 92

Manual headlight leveling dial 

P. 187

Instrument panel light control dial

P. 172

VSC off switch

P. 224

IS250/220d/200d_EE

For your information

Main Owner’s Manual

Please note that this manual covers all models and all equipment, including

options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not

installed on your vehicle.

All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.

However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement,

we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may dif-

fer from your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus

A wide variety of non genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehi-

cles are currently available in the market. Using these spare parts and acces-

sories which are not genuine Lexus produces may adversely affect the safety

of your vehicle, even though these parts may be approved by certain author-

ities in your country. Toyota Motor Corporation therefore cannot accept any

liability or guarantee spare parts and accessories which are not genuine

Lexus Products, nor for replacement or installation involving such parts.

This vehicle should not be modified with non genuine Lexus products. Mod-

ification with non genuine Lexus products could affect its performance,

safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addi-

tion, damage or performance problem resulting from the modification may

not be covered under warranty.

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Installation of an RF-transmitter system

The installation of an RF-transmitter system in your vehicle could affect

electronic systems such as:

Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system

Cruise control system

Dynamic radar cruise control system

Anti-lock brake system

SRS airbag system

Seat belt pretensioner system

Be sure to check with any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional for precautionary measures or spe-

cial instructions regarding installation of an RF-transmitter system.

Further information regarding frequency bands, power levels, antenna posi-

tions and installation provisions for the installation of RF-transmitters, is

available on request at any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional.

Scrapping your Lexus

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain

explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt

pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be

sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner

removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by any authorized

Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional, before you scrap your vehicle.

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

General precautions while driving

Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influ-

ence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your

vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and

reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in

death or serious injury.

Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other

drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.

Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that

distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or

reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you,

your occupants or others.

General precaution regarding children’s safety

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to

have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.

There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with

the cigarette lighter, the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the

vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the

vehicle can be fatal to children.

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Your vehicle contains batteries and/or accumulators. Do not discard them into

the environment but cooperate with separate collection (Directive 2006/66/

EC).

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Symbols used throughout this manual

Cautions & Notices

Symbols used in illustrations

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the

warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in

order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or

its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you

must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your

Lexus and its equipment.

Safety symbol

The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do

not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen.”

Arrows indicating operations

Indicates the action (pushing, turning,

etc.) used to operate switches and other

devices.

Indicates the outcome of an operation

(e.g. a lid opens).

Before driving

1-1. Key information

Keys ................................... 32

1-2. Opening, closing and

locking the doors and

trunk

Smart entry & start system. 37

Wireless remote control ..... 52

Doors.................................. 54

Trunk.................................. 59

1-3. Adjustable components (seats,

mirrors,

steering wheel)

Front seats.......................... 63

Driving position memory... 65

Head restraints ................... 69

Seat belts............................ 72

Steering wheel (manually

adjustable type)................ 77

Steering wheel

(power-adjustable type) ... 78

Anti-glare inside rear

view mirror ...................... 80

Outside rear view mirrors .. 82

1-4. Opening and closing

the windows and

moon roof

Power windows.................. 85

Moon roof.......................... 88

1-5. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap.. 92

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system 96

Double locking system .... 101

Alarm............................... 102

1-7. Safety information

Correct driving posture.... 108

SRS airbags....................... 110

Child restraint systems..... 121

Installing child restraints . 129

Airbag manual on/off

system............................ 139

IS250/220d/200d_EE

1-1. Key information

Keys

Key with the wireless remote control function

Electronic keys

• Operating the smart entry

& start system (P. 37)

• Operating the wireless

remote control function

(P. 52)

Mechanical keys

Key number plate

Card key without the wireless remote control function (if

equipped)

Electronic key

Operating the smart entry &

start system (P. 37)

Mechanical key

1-1. Key information

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Using the mechanical key

Take out the mechanical key.

The mechanical key can only be

inserted in one direction, as the

key only has grooves on one

side. If the key cannot be

inserted in a lock cylinder, turn

it over and re-attempt to insert

it.

After using the mechanical key,

store it in the electronic key.

Carry the mechanical key

together with the electronic key.

If the electronic key battery is

depleted or the entry function

does not operate properly, you

will need the mechanical key.

(P. 516)

Card key

The mechanical key that is stored inside the card key should be used

only if a problem arises, such as when the key does not operate properly.

If it is difficult to take out the mechanical key, push down the lock

release button using a pen tip etc. If it is difficult to pull it out, use a coin

etc.

1-1. Key information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

The card key is not waterproof.

When required to leave a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant

Turn the trunk opener main switch off and lock the glove box as circum-

stances demand. (P. 60, 356)

Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant

with the electronic key only.

Key number plate

Keep the plate in a safe place, not in the vehicle. In the event that a mechan-

ical key is lost, a new key can be made by any authorized Lexus dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional, using the key

number plate. (P. 515)

When riding in an aircraft

When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not

press any buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you

are carrying an electronic key in your bag etc, ensure that the buttons are not

likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the electronic

key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the air-

craft.

To store the mechanical key in the

card key, insert it inside while

pressing the lock release button.

If the battery was removed, reinstall

the battery with the positive termi-

nal facing the Lexus emblem.

1-1. Key information

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

NOTICE

To prevent key damage

Observe the following.

Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.

Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for a long period of time.

Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.

Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys

close to such materials.

Do not disassemble the keys.

Do not attach stickers that contain materials that block radio waves, such

as metallic materials, to the key.

Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as

TVs, audio systems, glass top ranges, or medical electrical equipment,

such as low-frequency therapy equipment.

Precautions for handling the card keys

Do not apply excess force when inserting the mechanical key to the card

key. Doing so may damage the card key.

If the battery or card key terminals get wet, the battery may corrode and

the card key may stop working.

If the key is dropped into water, or if drinking water etc. is spilled on the

key, immediately remove the battery cover and wipe the battery and ter-

minals. (To remove the battery cover, lightly grasp it and pull.) If the bat-

tery is corroded, have any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional, replace the battery.

Do not crush the battery cover or use a screwdriver to remove the battery

cover. Forcibly removing the battery cover may bend or damage the key.

If the battery cover is frequently removed, the battery cover may become

loose.

When installing the battery, make sure to check the direction of the bat-

tery.

Installing the battery in the wrong direction may cause the battery to

deplete rapidly.

1-1. Key information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

NOTICE

The surface of the card key may be damaged, or its coating may peel off

in the following situations.

• The card key is carried together with hard objects, such as coins or

keys.

• The card key is scraped with a sharp object, such as a tip of mechanical

pencil.

• The surface of the card key is wiped with thinners or benzene.

Carrying the electronic key on your person

When carrying the key, maintain a distance of at least 10 cm (3.9 in.) from

any of the following electrical appliances with their power on. If a distance

of 10 cm (3.9 in.) is not kept, radio waves may be interfered with, causing

the key to not function correctly.

• A portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless com-

munication device

• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)

• Digital audio players

• Portable game systems

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Smart entry & start system

The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the

electronic key (including the card key) on your person, for example

in your pocket.

(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)

Locks and unlocks the doors (P. 38)

Unlocks the trunk (P. 38)

Starts the engine (P. 153) : If equipped

Electronic key

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Unlocking and locking the doors (front door handles only)

Grip the handle to unlock the

door.

Make sure to touch the sensor

on the back of the handle.

The door cannot be unlocked

for 3 seconds after the door is

locked.

Press the lock button to lock the

door.

Pressing and holding the button

closes the windows and moon

roof.

Unlocking the trunk

Press the button to unlock the

trunk.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Antenna location and effective range

Antenna location

Antennas outside cabin

Antennas inside cabin

Antenna inside trunk

Antenna outside trunk

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is

detected)

When locking or unlock-

ing the doors

The system can be operated

when the electronic key is

within about 70 cm (2.3 ft.)

of either of the outside

front door handles. (Only

the doors detecting the key

can be operated.)

When unlocking the

trunk

The system can be operated

when the electronic key is

within about 70 cm (2.3 ft.)

of the trunk release button.

When starting the engine

or changing “ENGINE

START STOP” switch

modes

The system can be operated

when the electronic key is

inside the vehicle.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Operation signals

Doors: The emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been

locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)

Windows and moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and

moon roof are operating.

Conditions affecting operation

The smart entry & start system uses weak radio waves. In the following sit-

uations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may

be affected, preventing the smart entry & start system and wireless remote

control from operating properly:

(Ways of coping: P. 516)

When the electronic key battery is depleted

Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large

display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or elec-

trical noise

When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other

wireless communication devices

When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the follow-

ing metallic objects

• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached

• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside

• Metallic wallets or bags

• Coins

• Hand warmers made of metal

• Media such as CDs and DVDs

When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity

When another wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby

When carrying or using the electronic key together with the following

devices that emit radio waves

• Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio

waves

• Personal computer or personal digital assistant (PDA)

• Digital audio player

• Portable game system

If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to

the rear window

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Switching the door unlock function

It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks.

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.

Cancel the intrusion sensor of the alarm system to prevent unin-

tended triggering of the alarm during the setting change. (P. 102)

When the indicator on the key surface is turned off, push and

hold or for approximately 5 seconds while pushing

on the key.

The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below.

(When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at

least 5 seconds, and repeat step 3.)

To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock the doors using the

electronic key and open and close a door once after the settings have been

changed. (If a door is not opened within 30 seconds after is pressed, the

doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.)

In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 102)

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Multi-informa-

tion display Unlocking doors Beep

Hold the driver's door han-

dle to unlock only the

driver's door. Exterior: Beeps three

times

Interior: Pings once

Hold the front passenger’s

door handle to unlock all

doors.

Hold either front door han-

dle to unlock all doors. Exterior: Beeps twice

Interior: Pings once

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Battery-saving function

In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to

prevent the vehicle and electronic key batteries from discharging.

When the entry function has not been used for a month or more

When the electronic key has been left within approximately 1 m (3 ft.) of

the vehicle for 10 minutes or more

The system will resume operation when

The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock switch.

The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control func-

tion.

(P. 55)

The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the mechanical key. (P. 516)

Electronic key battery depletion

The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The card key battery life is

about a year and a half.)

If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the

engine stops. (P. 481)

The battery becomes depleted even if the electronic key is not used

because the key always receives radio waves. If the smart entry & start

system or the wireless remote control does not operate, or the detection

area becomes smaller, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery

when necessary.

(P. 431)

To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 1 m

(3 ft.) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic

field.

•TVs

• Personal computers

• Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers

• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones

• Glass top ranges

• Table lamps

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

IS250/220d/200d_EE

To operate the system properly

Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get

the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from

the outside of the vehicle.

Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the

key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly.

(The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not

function.)

Note for the entry function

Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection

areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases.

• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle,

near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or

unlocked.

• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to

the rear bumper center when the trunk is unlocked.

• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or

floor, or in the glove box when the engine is started or “ENGINE

START STOP” switch modes are changed.

Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the

door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave

reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin

and the door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping

the electronic key inside the vehicle.

As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may

be locked or unlocked by anyone.

Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to

start the engine if the electronic key is near the window.

The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door

handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash. (The doors will automatically

be locked after approximately 30 seconds if the doors are not opened and

closed.)

Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the

door.

If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the elec-

tronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not

be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to

unlock the doors.)

A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle operation may

prevent the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door han-

dle to the original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling

the door handle again.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

IS250/220d/200d_EE

When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods

To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 2 m (6

ft.) of the vehicle.

Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 30 seconds after the vehicle is

unlocked, the anti-theft system automatically locks the vehicle again.

Alarms and warning indicators

A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warnings displayed

on the multi-information display is used to prevent theft of the vehicle and

unforeseeable accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropri-

ate measures in response to any warning indications on the multi-informa-

tion display. (P. 473)

The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures

when only alarms are sounded.

Alarm Situation Correction procedure

Exterior alarm

sounds once for 2

seconds

Tried to lock the doors

using the entry function

while the electronic key is

still inside the passenger

compartment

Retrieve the electronic

key from the passen-

ger compartment and

lock the doors again.

Closed the trunk while the

electronic key is still

inside and all doors are

locked

Retrieve the electronic

key from the trunk

and close the trunk

lid.

Exterior alarm

sounds once for

60 seconds

Tried to exit the vehicle

with the electronic key and

lock the doors without first

turning the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch

OFF

Turn the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch

OFF and lock the

doors again.

Exterior alarm

sounds once for

10 seconds

Tried to lock the vehicle

using the entry function

while a door is open

Close all of the doors

and lock the doors

again.

It i l Tidt th d d

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

*: Vehicles with an automatic transmission only

If the smart entry & start system does not operate properly

Locking and unlocking the doors and trunk: Use the mechanical key.

(P. 516)

Starting the engine:P. 518

When the electronic key battery is fully depleted

P. 431

Customization that can be configured at any authorized Lexus dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional

It is possible to deactivate the operation signals of the system.

(Customizable featuresP. 556)

Certification for the smart entry & start system

Alarm Situation Correction procedure

Interior alarm

pings continu-

ously

Switched to ACCESSORY

mode while the driver's

door is open (Opened the

driver's door when the

“ENGINE START STOP”

switch is in ACCESSORY

mode.)

Close the driver's

door.

Turned the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch

OFF while the driver's Close the driver's

door

-Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by

the manufacturer.

-Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.

Hereby, DENSO CORPORATION declares that this 14AAC/

14ABC/13BZK is in compliance with the essential requirements

and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

IS250/220d/200d_EE

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

English

Hereby, Toyota Motor Corporation, declares that this TMLF-1 is in

compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions

of Directive 1999/5/EC.㩷

Finnish

Toyota Motor Corporation vakuuttaa täten että TMLF-1 tyyppinen laite on

direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin

muiden ehtojen mukainen.㩷

Dutch

Hierbij verklaart Toyota Motor Corporation dat het toestel TMLF-1 in

overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante

bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.㩷

French

Par la présente Toyota Motor Corporation déclare que l'appareil TMLF-1

est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions

pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.㩷

Swedish

Härmed intygar Toyota Motor Corporation att denna TMLF-1 står I

överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga

relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.

Danish

Undertegnede Toyota Motor Corporation erklærer herved, at følgende

udstyr TMLF-1 overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i

direktiv 1999/5/EF.

German

Hiermit erklärt Toyota Motor Corporation, dass sich das Gerät TMLF-1 in

Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den

übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.㩷

Greek

ȂǼ ȉǾȃ ȆǹȇȅȊȈǹ Toyota Motor Corporation ǻǾȁȍȃǼǿ ȅȉǿ TMLF-1

ȈȊȂȂȅȇĭȍȃǼȉǹǿ ȆȇȅȈ ȉǿȈ ȅȊȈǿȍǻǼǿȈ ǹȆǹǿȉǾȈǼǿȈ Ȁǹǿ ȉǿȈ

ȁȅǿȆǼȈ ȈȋǼȉǿȀǼȈ ǻǿǹȉǹȄǼǿȈ ȉǾȈ ȅǻǾīǿǹȈ 1999/5/EK.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Italian

Con la presente Toyota Motor Corporation dichiara che questo TMLF-1 è

conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite

dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.

Spanish

Por medio de la presente Toyota Motor Corporation declara que el

TMLF-1 cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras

disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.

Portuguese

Toyota Motor Corporation declara que este TMLF-1 está conforme com

os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva 1999/5/CE.㩷

Maltese

Hawnhekk, Toyota Motor Corporation, jiddikjara li dan TMLF-1

jikkonforma mal-ƫtiƥijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti oƫrajn relevanti li

hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.

Estonian

Käesolevaga kinnitab Toyota Motor Corporation seadme TMLF-1

vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist

tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.

Hungarian

Alulírott, Toyota Motor Corporation nyilatkozom, hogy a TMLF-1 megfelel

a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb

elõírásainak.

Slovak

Toyota Motor Corporation týmto vyhlasuje, že TMLF-1 spĎĖa základné

požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.

Czech

Toyota Motor Corporation tímto prohlašuje, že tento TMLF-1 je ve shodČ

se základními požadavky a dalšími pĜíslušnými ustanoveními smČrnice

1999/5/ES.

Slovenian

Toyota Motor Corporation izjavlja, da je ta TMLF-1 v skladu z bistvenimi

zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloþili direktive 1999/5/ES.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Lithuanian

Šiuo Toyota Motor Corporation deklaruoja, kad šis TMLF-1 atitinka

esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.

Latvian

Ar šo Toyota Motor Corporation deklarƝ, ka TMLF-1 atbilst DirektƯvas

1999/5/EK bǌtiskajƗm prasƯbƗm un citiem ar to saistƯtajiem noteikumiem.㩷

Polish

Niniejszym Toyota Motor Corporation oĞwiadcza, Īe TMLF-1 jest zgodny z

zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaáymi stosownymi postanowieniami

Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.

Icelandic

Hér með lýsir Toyota Motor Corporation yfir því að TMLF-1 er í samræmi

við grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.

Norwegian

Toyota Motor Corporation erklærer herved at utstyret TMLF-1 er i

samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv

1999/5/EF.

Montenegro

Ovim, Toyota Motor Corporation, izjavljuje da ovaj TMLF-1 je usklaÿen sa

bitnim zahtjevima i drugim relevantnim odredbama Direktive 1999/5/EC.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should main-

tain a reasonable distance between themselves and the smart entry & start

system antennas. (P. 39)

The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary,

the entry function can be disabled. Ask any authorized Lexus dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional, for details,

such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio

waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry

function.

User of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers

and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of

the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio

waves.

Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such med-

ical devices.

Ask any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional, for details for disabling the entry function.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Wireless remote control

The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle

and the trunk from outside the vehicle.

One short press: Locks all

doors

Press and hold: Closes the

windows and moon roof*

One short press: Unlocks

all doors

Press and hold: Opens the

windows and moon roof*

Unlocks the trunk

(press and hold)

*:This setting must be custom-

ized at any authorized Lexus

dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Operation signals

Doors: The emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been

locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)

Windows and moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and

moon roof are operating.

Door lock buzzer

If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds if an attempt to lock the door is

made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once

more.

Alarm

Using the wireless remote control to lock the doors will set the alarm sys-

tem.

Electronic key battery depletion

P. 44

When the electronic key battery is fully depleted

P. 431

Security feature

P. 48

Conditions affecting operation

P. 42

Customization that can be configured at any authorized Lexus dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional

Settings (e.g. trunk unlocking function) can be changed.

(Customizable features P. 556)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

When closing the windows or moon roof using wireless remote control

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body

in a position where it could be caught when a window or moon roof is

being operated.

To prevent inadvertent power windows and moon roof operation, never let

a small child have and use the wireless remote control.

Jam protection function

Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection

function intentionally.

The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just

before the window or moon roof fully closes.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Doors

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function,

wireless remote control or door lock switch.

Entry function

P. 38

Wireless remote control

P. 55

Door lock switch

Locks all doors

Unlocks all doors

Inside lock button

Locks the door

Unlocks the door

The front doors can be

opened by pulling the inside

handle even if the lock button

is in the lock position.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Locking the front doors from the outside without a key

Move the lock button to the lock position.

Close the door while pulling the door handle.

The door cannot be locked if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch

is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key

is left inside the vehicle.

Depending on the position of the electronic key, the key may not be

detected correctly and the door may be locked.

Rear door child-protector lock

The door cannot be opened

from inside the vehicle when

the locks are set.

These locks can be set to pre-

vent children from opening the

rear doors. Push down on each

rear door switch to lock both

rear doors.

STEP 1

STEP 2

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Automatic door locking and unlocking systems

The following functions can be set or cancelled:

*: Vehicles with an automatic transmission only

Function Operation

Shift position linked

door locking function* Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all

doors.

Shift position linked

door unlocking func-

tion*

Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all

doors.

Speed linked door lock-

ing function

All doors are locked when the vehicle

speed is approximately 20 km/h (12 mph)

or higher.

Driver's door linked

door unlocking function

All doors are unlocked when the driver's

door is opened within approximately 45

seconds after turning the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch OFF.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Setting and canceling the function

To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure

below:

Close all the doors and switch the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode. (Perform the step 2

within 10 seconds.)

Shift the shift lever to P or N,

press and hold the driver’s door

lock switch ( or ) for

about 5 seconds then release.

The shift lever and switch posi-

tions corresponding to the

desired function to be set are

shown as follows.

Use the same procedure to can-

cel the function.

*: Vehicles with an automatic transmission only

When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are

locked and then unlocked.

STEP 1

STEP 2

Function Shift lever posi-

tion

Driver’s door

lock switch posi-

tion

Shift position linked door lock-

ing function* P

Shift position linked door

unlocking function*

Speed linked door locking func-

tion N

Driver's door linked door unlock-

ing function

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Impact detection door lock release system

In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are

unlocked. Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident,

however, the system may not operate.

Using the mechanical key

The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P.

516)

Customization that can be configured at any authorized Lexus dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional

Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.

(Customizable features P. 556)

CAUTION

To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.

Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out,

resulting in death or serious injury.

Always use a seat belt.

Ensure that all doors are properly closed.

Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.

The doors may be opened and the passengers may be thrown out of the

vehicle, resulting in death or serious injury.

Be especially careful for the front doors, as the door may be opened even

if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.

Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear

seat.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Trunk

The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, entry function or

wireless remote control.

Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle

Type A

Press the opener switch.

Type B

Press the opener switch.

Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle

Entry function

P. 38

Wireless remote control

P. 55

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Locking the trunk opener feature

Turn the trunk opener main

switch in the glove box off to

disable the trunk opener.

Off

The trunk lid cannot be opened

even with the wireless remote

control or the entry function.

Trunk light

When the trunk light switch is set to on, the trunk light turns on when the

trunk is opened.

Trunk handle

Using the mechanical key

The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. (P. 516)

Off

Use the trunk handle when closing the

trunk.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Which key to the vehicle is to leave with a parking attendant after disabling

the trunk opener main switch

P. 34

CAUTION

Caution while driving

Keep the trunk lid closed while driving.

If the trunk lid is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or lug-

gage in the trunk may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.

In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a seri-

ous health hazard. Make sure to close the trunk lid before driving.

Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If

the trunk lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving,

causing an accident.

Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a colli-

sion, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.

When children are in the vehicle

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Do not allow children to enter the trunk.

If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could overheat or suffo-

cate.

Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid.

Doing so may cause the trunk lid to operate unexpectedly, or cause the

child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Using the trunk

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in seri-

ous injury.

Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before

opening it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to fall closed again

after it is opened.

When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the

surrounding area is safe.

If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that

the trunk is about to open or close.

Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it

may move abruptly in strong wind.

Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk

lid. Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to fall closed

again after it is opened.

The trunk lid may fall if it is not

opened fully. It is more difficult to

open or close the trunk lid on an

incline than on a level surface, so

beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly

opening or closing by itself. Make

sure that the trunk lid is fully open

and secure before using the trunk.

When closing the trunk lid, take extra

care to prevent your fingers etc. from

being caught.

When closing the trunk lid, make

sure to press it lightly on its outer

surface. If the trunk handle is used to

fully close the trunk lid, it may result

in hands or arms being caught.

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Front seats

Manual seat

Seat position lever

Seatback angle lever

Vertical height adjustment lever

Seat cushion (front) angle knob

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Power seat

Seat position switch

Seatback angle switch

Seat cushion (front) angle switch

Vertical height adjustment switch

Lumbar support switch

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Seat adjustment

Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion

to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt.

If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply

restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the

shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of

an accident.

Manual seat only: After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is

locked in position.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Driving position memory (driver’s seat)

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver's seat, steer-

ing wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be memorized and

recalled with the touch of a button. It is also possible to set this func-

tion to activate automatically when the doors are unlocked.

Three different driving positions can be entered into memory.

Entering a position to memory

Switch to IGNITION ON mode.

Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear

view mirrors to the desired positions.

Push the “SET” button, then

within 3 seconds push button

“1”, “2” or “3” until the sig-

nal beeps.

If the selected button has

already been preset, the pre-

viously recorded position

will be overwritten.

Recalling the memorized position

Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Check that the shift

lever is set in P.

Vehicles with a manual transmission: Check that the parking

brake is set.

Switch to IGNITION ON mode.

Push button “1”, “2” or “3”

to recall the memorized posi-

tion.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

: If equipped

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation

Record your driving position to button “1”, “2” or “3” before per-

forming the following.

Carry only the key (including the card key) to which you want to

link the driving position. If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the

driving position cannot be linked properly.

: If equipped

Using the wireless remote control

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and close

the driver's door.

Press and hold the desired but-

ton (“1”, “2” or “3”) while

pressing on the wireless

remote control until the signal

beeps.

The driving position is recalled

when the driver's door is

unlocked using the entry func-

tion or wireless remote control

and the driver's door is opened.

To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, open and close a

door once after a driving position has been recorded. (If a door is

not opened within 30 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be

locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.)

In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm.

(P. 102)

STEP 1

STEP 2

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Using the door lock switch

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and close

the driver's door.

While pressing the desired but-

ton (“1”, “2” or “3”), press the

lock or unlock side on the

driver’s door lock switch until

the signal beeps.

The driving position is recalled

when the driver's door is

unlocked using the entry func-

tion or wireless remote control

and the driver's door is opened.

STEP 1

STEP 2

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Canceling the linked door unlock operation

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and close the

driver's door.

Using the wireless remote control: While pushing the “SET” but-

ton, press on the wireless remote control until the signal

beeps.

Using the door lock switch: While pressing the “SET” button, press

the lock or unlock side on the door lock switch until the signal

beeps.

Operating the driving position memory after turning the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch OFF

Memorized positions (except for the steering wheel position) can be acti-

vated up to 180 seconds after the driver’s door is opened and another 60 sec-

onds after it is closed again, even after turning the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch OFF.

To cancel seat position recall

Perform any of the following operations.

Push the “SET” button.

Push button “1”, “2” or “3”.

Adjust the seat using the switches (only cancels seat position recall).

If the battery is disconnected

The memorized positions are erased when the battery is disconnected.

CAUTION

Seat adjustment caution

Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear pas-

senger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.

STEP 1

STEP 2

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Head restraints

Removing the head restraints (front seats)

Vertical adjustment

Pull the head restraints up.

Down

Front and center rear seats:

Push the head restraint down

while pushing the lock

release button.

Folding operation (outside

rear seats only)

To stow the head restraint by

folding it forward, pull the

head restraint up while push-

ing the lock release button.

Only the button on the right

stay (when facing the front of

the vehicle) can be used to

fold the head restraint for-

Lock release but-

Pull the head restraint up while pushing

the lock release button.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Removing the head restraint (center rear seat)

Removing the head restraints (outside rear seats)

Adjusting the height of the head restraints

When using the rear seat head restraints

Center rear seat: Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed

position when using.

Outside rear seats: Make sure the head restraints are not in the stowed/

folded position while in use.

Pull the head restraint up while pushing

the lock release button.

Lock release but-

Pull the head restraint up while pushing

both of the lock release buttons.

Lock release but-

Make sure that the head restraints are

adjusted so that the center of the head

restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Head restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to

do so may result in death or serious injury.

Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.

Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.

After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure

they are locked in position.

Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving

the vehicle.

Correct use of the seat belts

Extend the shoulder belt so

that it comes fully over the

shoulder, but does not

come into contact with the

neck or slide off the shoul-

der.

Position the lap belt as low

as possible over the hips.

Adjust the position of the

seatback. Sit up straight

and well back in the seat.

Do not twist the seat belt.

Fastening and releasing the seat belt

Fastening the belt

Push the tab into the buckle

until a clicking sound is

heard.

Releasing the belt

Press the release button.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Seat belt comfort guide (outside rear seats)

If the shoulder belt sits close to

a person’s neck, slide the seat

belt comfort guide forward.

Seat belt pretensioners (front and outside rear seats)

The pretensioner helps the seat

belt to quickly restrain the

occupant by retracting the seat

belt when the vehicle is sub-

jected to certain types of severe

frontal collision.

The pretensioner may not acti-

vate in the event of a minor

frontal impact, a side impact or

a rear impact.

Adjusting the height of the belt (front seats)

Down

Move the height adjuster up

and down as needed until you

hear a click.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Pre-crash seat belts (front seats of vehicles with pre-crash safety sys-

tem)

If the pre-crash sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the

pre-crash safety system will retract the seat belt, thus enhancing

the effectiveness of the seat belt pretensioner in a crash.

The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or

loses control of the vehicle. (P. 229)

Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may

also lock if you lean forward or pull out the belt too quickly. Allow the belt

to fully retract, and then slowly extend the belt. If the belt cannot be pulled

out of the retractor, firmly pull the belt and release it. You will then be able

to smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.

Pregnant women

People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat

belt in the proper way. (P. 74)

Women who are pregnant should position

the lap belt as low as possible over the

hips in the same manner as other occu-

pants. Extend the shoulder belt com-

pletely over the shoulder and position the

belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact

over the rounding of the abdominal area.

If the seat belt is not worn properly, not

only a pregnant woman, but also the fetus

could suffer death or serious injury as a

result of sudden braking or a collision.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle are principally designed for persons of adult

size.

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child

becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 121)

When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat

belt, follow the instructions on P. 74 regarding seat belt usage.

Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated

If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will acti-

vate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent

collisions.

Seat belt regulations

If seat belt regulations exist in the country where you reside, please contact

any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional, for seat belt replacement or installation.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of

sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Failing to do so may cause death or severe injury.

Wearing a seat belt

Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.

Always wear a seat belt properly.

Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt

for more than one person at once, including children.

Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use

a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.

Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seat-

ing position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting

up straight and well back in the seats.

Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.

Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

When children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes

twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious inju-

ries that could result in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used

to cut the belt.

Seat belt pretensioners

If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that

case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at any autho-

rized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-

fessional.

Seat belt damage and wear

Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating

properly resulting in death or serious injury.

Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be

jammed in the door.

Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and

loose parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged

seat belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.

Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted.

If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact any autho-

rized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-

fessional.

Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been

involved in a serious accident, even if there's no obvious damage.

Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the

seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by any authorized Lexus

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Steering wheel (manually adjustable type)

CAUTION

Caution while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident,

resulting in death or serious injury.

After adjusting the steering wheel

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.

Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an

accident.

The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.

Hold the steering wheel and

press the lever down.

Adjust to the ideal position

by moving the steering wheel

horizontally and vertically.

After adjustment, pull the

lever up to secure the steering

wheel.

STEP 1

STEP 2

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Steering wheel (power-adjustable type)

Auto tilt away

When the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch is turned OFF,

the steering wheel returns to its

stowed position by moving up

and away to enable easier

driver entry and exit.

Switching to ACCESSORY or

IGNITION ON mode will

return the steering wheel to the

original position.

The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.

Down

Away from the driver

Toward the driver

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

The steering wheel can be adjusted when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION

ON mode.

Automatic adjustment of the steering position (vehicles with driving posi-

tion memory)

A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automat-

ically by the driving position memory. (P. 66)

Customization that can be configured at any authorized Lexus dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional

It is possible to deactivate the auto tilt-away function.

(Customizable featuresP. 556)

CAUTION

Caution while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an acci-

dent, resulting in death or serious injury.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror

Glare from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by using

the following functions.

Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror (if equipped)

Normal position

Anti-glare position

Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror (if equipped)

In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights

of vehicles behind and automatically reduce the reflected

light.

Turns automatic mode on/off

The indicator comes on when

automatic mode is turned on.

The anti-glare mirror default

mode is automatic. The anti-

glare mirror is automatically

set to automatic whenever the

“ENGINE START STOP”

switch is turned to IGNI-

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Adjusting the height of rear view mirror

Adjust the height of the rear

view mirror by moving it up

and down.

To prevent sensor error (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view mir-

ror)

CAUTION

Caution while driving

Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.

Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting

in death or serious injury.

To ensure that the sensors operate prop-

erly, do not touch or cover them.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Outside rear view mirrors

Folding back the mirrors

Press the button to fold back the

mirrors

Push once more to return to the

original position.

On some models: The outside

rear view mirrors will be folded

or extended automatically

linked with the door locking or

unlocking operations. This fea-

ture can be turned on or off

using the satellite switches.

(P. 365)

Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch.

Select a mirror to adjust

(“L”: left or “R”: right)

Adjust the mirror up,

down, in, or out using the

switch

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

The mirrors can be adjusted when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION

ON mode.

When the mirrors are fogged up

Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (P. 264)

One-touch adjustment of the mirror angle

(vehicles with driving position memory)

A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and adjusted with the

touch of a button. (P. 66)

Linked mirror function when reversing (vehicles with driving position

memory)

The outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the

vehicle is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground. However,

this function will not operate when the mirror select switch is in the neutral

position (between “L” and “R”).

Auto anti-glare function (vehicles with auto anti-glare mirror)

When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the

outside rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare

inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (P. 82)

Rain clearing mirrors (if equipped)

When water droplets collects on the mirror surface, for example when it

rains, the rain clearing (hydrophilic) effect of the mirrors causes the droplets

to be spread out into a film making the rear view clearer. In the following

cases, the rain clearing effect will be reduced temporarily, but will return

after 1 or 2 days' exposure to direct sunlight.

After wiping dirt off the mirrors

When the mirrors fog up

After waxing your vehicle in an automatic car wash

After your vehicle has been parked for a long period in underground

parking lots, etc. where there is no direct sunlight

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

When driving the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while driving.

Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an

accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

Do not drive with the mirrors folded back.

Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly

adjusted before driving.

When a mirror is moving

To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your

hand caught by the moving mirror.

When the mirror defoggers are operating

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and

burn you.

NOTICE

If the mirrors become iced up

In order to retain the rain-clearing properties of the mirror, do not attempt to

scrape the ice off. Instead, remove it by turning on the mirror defoggers or

by applying warm water.

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows

Lock switch

Press the switch down to lock

the passenger window switches.

Use this switch to prevent chil-

dren from accidentally opening

or closing a passenger window.

The passenger windows can still

be opened and closed using the

driver’s switch even if the lock

switch is on.

The power windows can be opened and closed using the following

switches.

Closing

One-touch closing*

Opening

One-touch opening*

*:Pushing the switch in the

opposite direction will stop

window travel partway.

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

IS250/220d/200d_EE

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

The power windows can be operated when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

Operating the power windows after turning the “ENGINE START STOP”

switch OFF

The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even

after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY

mode or turned OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front

door is opened.

Jam protection function

If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame,

window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.

When the power window does not close normally

If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot

be closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch

on the relevant door.

After stopping the vehicle, the window can be closed by holding the

power window switch in the one-touch closing position while the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.

If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation

explained above, initialize the function by performing the following pro-

cedure.

Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position.

Continue holding the switch for a further 6 seconds after the win-

dow has closed.

Hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position.

Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the win-

dow has opened completely.

Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position

once again. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds

after the window has closed.

If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the

beginning.

If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after per-

forming the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by any

authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Door lock linked window operation

The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.

(P. 516)

The power windows can be closed using the entry function. (P. 38)

Customization that can be configured at any authorized Lexus dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional

Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.

(Customizable features P. 556)

CAUTION

Closing the windows

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body

in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

Do not allow children to operate the power windows.

Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in

some instances, even death.

Jam protection function

Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection

function intentionally.

The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just

before the window fully closes.

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Moon roof

Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up

and down.

Opening and closing

Open*

The moon roof stops slightly

before the fully opened posi-

tion.

Push the switch again to fully

open.

Close*

*:Lightly press either of the

moon roof switches to stop

the moon roof partway.

Tilting up and down

Tilt up*

Tilt down*

*:Lightly press either of the

moon roof switches to stop

the moon roof partway.

: If equipped

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

IS250/220d/200d_EE

The moon roof can be operated when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

Moon roof open warning buzzer

The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display

in the instrument panel when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned

OFF and the driver's door is opened with the moon roof open.

Door lock linked moon roof operation

The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. (P.

516)

The moon roof can be closed using the entry function. (P. 38)

Operating the moon roof after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch

OFF

The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or

turned OFF. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is

opened.

Jam protection function

If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing

or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.

To reduce moon roof wind noise

When the moon roof is opened automatically, it will stop slightly before the

fully open position. Driving with the moon roof in this position can help

reduce wind noise.

Sunshade

The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade

will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly

Stop the vehicle.

Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch until the moon roof com-

pletely closes.

During the operation, the moon roof will move in the manner out-

lined below. If the switch is released during the operation, the oper-

ation will have to be performed again from the beginning.

The moon roof will close, open and then pause for approximately

10 seconds. Then it will close, tilt up and pause for approximately 1

second, after which it will tilt down and open and then close.

If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above proce-

dure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up

Stop the vehicle.

Press and hold the “TILT” switch until the moon roof moves into

the tilt up position and stops.

Release the “TILT” switch once and then press and hold the

“TILT” switch until the moon roof completely closes.

After moving to the tilt up position, the moon roof will move in the

following manner. If the switch is released during the operation, the

operation will have to be performed again from the beginning.

The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds while in

the tilt up position and then make some fine adjustments. Follow-

ing this, it will pause for approximately 1 second, tilt down, open

and then close.

If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above proce-

dure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

Customization that can be configured at any authorized Lexus dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional

Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.

(Customizable features P. 556)

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Opening the moon roof

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.

Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehi-

cle while it is moving.

Do not sit on top of the moon roof.

Closing the moon roof

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bodies

in a position where they could be caught when the moon roof is being

operated.

Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.

Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.

Jam protection function

Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection

function intentionally.

The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just

before the moon roof fully closes.

IS250/220d/200d_EE

1-5. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap

Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.

Before refueling the vehicle

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and ensure

that all the doors and windows are closed.

Opening the fuel tank cap

Type A

Press the opener switch.

Type B

Press the opener switch.

Turn the fuel tank cap slowly

to open.

STEP 1

STEP 2

1-5. Refueling

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Closing the fuel tank cap

When replacing the fuel tank

cap, turn it until a clicking

sound is heard.

After releasing your hand, the

cap will turn slightly in the

opposite direction.

Hang the fuel tank cap on the

back of the fuel filler door.

STEP 3

1-5. Refueling

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Fuel types

Use of ethanol blended gasoline in a gasoline engine

Lexus allows the use of ethanol blended gasoline where the ethanol content

is up to 10%. Make sure that the ethanol blended gasoline to be used has a

Research Octane Number that follows the above.

Fuel tank capacity (reference)

65 L (17.2 gal., 14.3 Imp. gal.)

When the fuel filler door opener is inoperable

Engine Type

IS250

EU area:

Unleaded gasoline conforming to

European standard EN228, Research

Octane Number of 95 or higher

Except EU area:

Unleaded gasoline, Research Octane

Number of 95 or higher

IS220d and IS 200d

EU area:

Diesel fuel conforming to European

standard EN590

Except EU area:

Diesel fuel that contains 50 ppm or

less of sulfur and has a cetane number

of 48 or higher

The lever can be used to open the fuel

filler door if the fuel filler door cannot be

opened using the inside switch because

the battery is discharged or for any other

reason.

1-5. Refueling

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static elec-

tricity.

Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel

vapors to ignite.

Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.

A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.

Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap.

In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause

injury.

Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their

bodies to come close to an open fuel tank.

Do not inhale vaporized fuel.

Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.

Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.

Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.

Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically

charged.

This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible igni-

tion hazard.

When replacing the fuel cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your

vehicle. Failure to do so may cause a fire or other incident which may result

in death or serious injury.

1-5. Refueling

IS250/220d/200d_EE

NOTICE

Refueling

Do not spill fuel during refueling.

Failing to do so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust sys-

tems to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the

vehicle's painted surface.

IS250/220d/200d_EE

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system

System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.

Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction

If the key is in contact with a metallic object

If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security sys-

tem (key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle

The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the

engine from starting if the key has not been previously registered in

the vehicle's on-board computer.

Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The indicator light flashes

after the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch has been

turned OFF to indicate that

the system is operating.

The indicator light stops

flashing after the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch has

been turned to ACCESSORY

or IGNITION ON mode to

indicate that the system has

bld

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Engine immobilizer certification

1-6. Theft deterrent system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

English

Hereby, Toyota Motor Corporation, declares that this TMIMB-1 is in

compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions

of Directive 1999/5/EC.㩷

Finnish

Toyota Motor Corporation vakuuttaa täten että TMIMB-1 tyyppinen laite

on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien

direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.㩷

Dutch

Hierbij verklaart Toyota Motor Corporation dat het toestel TMIMB-1 in

overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante

bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.㩷

French

Par la présente Toyota Motor Corporation déclare que l'appareil TMIMB-1

est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions

pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.㩷

Swedish

Härmed intygar Toyota Motor Corporation att denna TMIMB-1 står I

överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga

relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.

Danish

Undertegnede Toyota Motor Corporation erklærer herved, at følgende

udstyr TMIMB-1 overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i

direktiv 1999/5/EF.

German

Hiermit erklärt Toyota Motor Corporation, dass sich das Gerät TMIMB-1 in

Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den

übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.㩷

Greek

ȂǼ ȉǾȃ ȆǹȇȅȊȈǹ Toyota Motor Corporation ǻǾȁȍȃǼǿ ȅȉǿ TMIMB-1

ȈȊȂȂȅȇĭȍȃǼȉǹǿ ȆȇȅȈ ȉǿȈ ȅȊȈǿȍǻǼǿȈ ǹȆǹǿȉǾȈǼǿȈ Ȁǹǿ ȉǿȈ

ȁȅǿȆǼȈ ȈȋǼȉǿȀǼȈ ǻǿǹȉǹȄǼǿȈ ȉǾȈ ȅǻǾīǿǹȈ 1999/5/EK.

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Italian

Con la presente Toyota Motor Corporation dichiara che questo TMIMB-1

è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti

stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.

Spanish

Por medio de la presente Toyota Motor Corporation declara que el

TMIMB-1 cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras

disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.

Portuguese

Toyota Motor Corporation declara que este TMIMB-1 está conforme com

os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva 1999/5/CE.㩷

Maltese

Hawnhekk, Toyota Motor Corporation, jiddikjara li dan TMIMB-1

jikkonforma mal-ƫtiƥijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti oƫrajn relevanti li

hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.

Estonian

Käesolevaga kinnitab Toyota Motor Corporation seadme TMIMB-1

vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist

tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.

Hungarian

Alulírott, Toyota Motor Corporation nyilatkozom, hogy a TMIMB-1

megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC

irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.

Slovak

Toyota Motor Corporation týmto vyhlasuje, že TMIMB-1 spĎĖa základné

požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.

Czech

Toyota Motor Corporation tímto prohlašuje, že tento TMIMB-1 je ve shodČ

se základními požadavky a dalšími pĜíslušnými ustanoveními smČrnice

1999/5/ES.

Slovenian

Toyota Motor Corporation izjavlja, da je ta TMIMB-1 v skladu z bistvenimi

zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloþili direktive 1999/5/ES.

100

1-6. Theft deterrent system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

NOTICE

To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper

operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

Lithuanian

Šiuo Toyota Motor Corporation deklaruoja, kad šis TMIMB-1 atitinka

esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.

Latvian

Ar šo Toyota Motor Corporation deklarƝ, ka TMIMB-1 atbilst DirektƯvas

1999/5/EK bǌtiskajƗm prasƯbƗm un citiem ar to saistƯtajiem noteikumiem.㩷

Polish

Niniejszym Toyota Motor Corporation oĞwiadcza, Īe TMIMB-1 jest zgodny z

zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaáymi stosownymi postanowieniami

Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.

Icelandic

Hér með lýsir Toyota Motor Corporation yfir því að TMIMB-1 er í samræmi

við grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.

Norwegian

Toyota Motor Corporation erklærer herved at utstyret TMIMB-1 er i

samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv

1999/5/EF.

Montenegro

Ovim, Toyota Motor Corporation, izjavljuje da ovaj TMIMB-1 je usklaÿen

sa bitnim zahtjevima i drugim relevantnim odredbama Direktive

1999/5/EC.

101

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Double locking system

Setting the double locking system

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF, have all the pas-

sengers exit the vehicle and ensure that all the doors are closed.

Using the entry function:

Press the lock button on the outside door handle twice within 2.5

seconds.

Using the wireless remote control:

Press twice within 5 seconds.

Canceling the double locking system

Using the entry function: Hold the outside door handle.

Using the wireless remote control: Press .

CAUTION

Double locking system precaution

Never activate the double locking system when there are people in the vehi-

cle, because all the doors cannot be opened from inside the vehicle.

Unauthorized access to the vehicle is prevented by disabling the door

unlocking function from both the interior and exterior of the vehicle.

Vehicles employing this sys-

tem have labels on the win-

dow glass of both front

doors.

102

1-6. Theft deterrent system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Alarm

The system sounds the alarm and flashes the lights when forcible entry

is detected.

Triggering of the alarm

The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the

alarm is set.

A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened in any way

other than using the entry function or wireless remote door

lock function.

The hood is opened.

The intrusion sensor detects something moving inside the

vehicle. (An intruder gets in the vehicle.)

Setting the alarm system

Close the doors, trunk and

hood, and lock all doors

using the entry function or

the wireless remote control.

The system will be set auto-

matically after 30 seconds.

The indicator light changes

from being on to flashing

when the system is set.

Deactivating or stopping the alarm

Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm.

Unlock the doors or trunk using the entry function or the

wireless remote control.

Start the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped

after a few seconds.)

103

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Intrusion sensor (if equipped)

The sensor detects an intruder or movement in the vehicle. When

an intruder or movement is detected, the alarm will be triggered.

This system is designed to deter and prevent vehicle theft but does

not guarantee absolute security against all intrusions.

For details about the alarm, refer to “Alarm”.

Canceling the intrusion sensor (if equipped)

The operation of sensor can be canceled using the satellite

switches.

(P. 365)

System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.

Points to remember before locking the doors

To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm, make sure to check the fol-

lowing before locking the doors:

Nobody is in the vehicle.

The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.

The alarm system does not guarantee absolute security. To help prevent

theft, make sure to check that no valuables and so forth are left in the vehi-

cle.

104

1-6. Theft deterrent system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Unexpected triggering of the alarm

In the following situations, perform an operation that will deactivate or stop

the alarm. (P. 102)

The battery is disconnected. (some models)

Alarm-operated door lock

When the alarm is operating, the doors are locked automatically to pre-

vent intruders.

Do not leave the key inside the vehicle when the alarm is operating, and

make sure the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing

the battery.

The doors or trunk are unlocked using

the mechanical key.

When someone without a key is left in

the vehicle and the doors are locked.

When a door, the trunk or hood is

opened from inside the vehicle, the

alarm may be triggered.

When the battery is recharged or

replaced, due to battery discharge and

so forth, after locking the doors.

(some models)

The alarm may be activated when the

hood is opened and the battery is recon-

nected after the mechanical key has

been used to unlock the doors.

105

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Canceling the intrusion sensor

The alarm will be set even when the intrusion sensor is canceled.

To re-enable the intrusion sensor, press the “ENGINE START STOP”

switch or unlock the doors using the wireless remote door lock function

while the intrusion sensor is canceled.

Automatic re-enabling of the intrusion sensor

When the alarm system is set again, the intrusion sensor will also be set.

Intrusion sensor

The sensor may trigger the alarm in the following situations. Before locking

the doors, turn off the intrusion sensor. (P. 103)

Persons or pets are in the vehicle.

Unstable items, such as dangling accessories or clothes hanging on the

coat hooks, are in the vehicle.

The windows or moon roof are open.

The vehicle is parked in a place where extreme vibration or noises occur,

such as in a parking garage.

The vehicle is inside an automatic or high-pressure car wash.

The vehicle experiences impacts, such as hail, lightning strikes, or other

kinds of repeated impacts or vibrations.

Ice or snow is removed from the vehicle, causing the vehicle to receive

repeated impacts or vibrations.

The wind or something similar causes an externally mounted reflectively

coated windshield cover to move.

When the battery is disconnected

Be sure to deactivate the alarm system.

If the battery is disconnected before deactivating the alarm system, the

alarm may be triggered when the battery is reconnected.

When using the mechanical key to unlock the doors or trunk

Deactivate the alarm.

If the doors or trunk are unlocked using the mechanical key with the alarm

operational, the alarm will be triggered.

106

1-6. Theft deterrent system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Certification

The sensor installed to vehicles sold other than UK and Ireland is not

allowed to operate in UK.

The latest “DECLARATION of CONFORMITY” (DoC) is available at the

address stated in the DoC.

107

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

NOTICE

To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper

operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

108

IS250/220d/200d_EE

1-7. Safety information

Correct driving posture

Drive in a good posture as follows:

Sit upright and well back

in the seat. (P. 63)

Adjust the position of the

seat forward or backward

to ensure the pedals can be

reached and easily

depressed to the extent

required. (P. 63)

Adjust the seatback so that

the controls are easily

operable. (P. 63)

Adjust the tilt and tele-

scopic positions of the

steering wheel downward

so the airbag is facing your

chest.

(P. 79, 80)

Lock the head restraint in

place with the center of the

head restraint closest to the

top of your ears. (P. 71)

Wear the seat belt cor-

109

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

While driving

Do not adjust the position of the driver's seat while driving.

Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.

A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce

the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of

death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.

Do not place anything under the front seats.

Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat

tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an acci-

dent. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.

Adjusting the seat position:

Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers

are not injured by the moving seat.

Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid

injury.

Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

110

1-7. Safety information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

SRS airbags

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types

of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants.

They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death

or serious injury.

SRS front airbags

SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag

Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front

passenger from impact with interior components.

SRS knee airbags

Can help provide driver and front passenger protection.

SRS side and curtain shield airbags

SRS side airbags

Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants.

SRS curtain shield airbags

Can help protect primarily the head of outside occupants.

111

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Airbag system components

The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The

SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly.

The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an air-

bag sensor.

In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag

system triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the

inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain

the motion of the occupants.

Knee airbags

Airbag manual on-off

switch

Front passenger airbag

Curtain shield airbags

Side airbags

Passenger airbag indicator

light

Curtain shield airbag sen-

sors

SRS warning light

Driver airbag

Driver's seat belt buckle

switch

Driver's seat position sensor

Side and curtain shield air-

bag sensors

Airbag sensor assembly

Front airbag sensors

112

1-7. Safety information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)

Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying

(inflating) SRS airbag.

A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel, airbag cover and inflator) as

well as the front seats, and parts of the front pillar, rear pillar and roof

side rail, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be

hot.

The windshield may crack.

SRS airbag deployment conditions (front airbags)

The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds

the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approxi-

mately 20 - 30 km/h [12 - 18 mph] frontal collision with a fixed wall that

does not move or deform).

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle

strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or

deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision

(e.g. a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes

under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of

the vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front

airbags and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.

SRS airbag deployment conditions (side and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the

event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force

corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 1500 kg

[3300 lb.] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpen-

dicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 20 - 30

km/h

[12 - 18 mph]).

113

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a

collision

The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the

underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (front airbags)

The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is

involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a

low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes

sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front

airbags may occur.

Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or

hard surface

Falling into or jumping over a deep

hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

Collision from the side

Collision from the rear

Vehicle rollover

114

1-7. Safety information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags

(side and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the

vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a colli-

sion to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.

The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are not generally designed

to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls

over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.

Collision from the side to the vehicle

body other than the passenger com-

partment

Collision from the side at an angle

Collision from the front

Collision from the rear

Vehicle rollover

115

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

When to contact any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional

In the following cases, contact any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional, as soon as possible.

Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.

The front of the vehicle is damaged or

deformed, or was involved in an acci-

dent that was not severe enough to

cause the SRS airbags to inflate.

A portion of the doors is damaged or

deformed, or the vehicle was involved

in an accident that was not severe

enough to cause the SRS side airbags

and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

The pad section of the steering wheel,

dashboard or lower portion of the

instrument panel is scratched,

cracked, or otherwise damaged.

The surface of the seats with the side

airbag is scratched, cracked, or other-

wise damaged.

The portion of the front pillars, rear

pillars or roof side rail garnishes (pad-

ding) containing the curtain shield air-

bags inside is scratched, cracked, or

otherwise damaged.

116

1-7. Safety information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts

properly.

The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause

death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.

Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 50 - 75 mm (2 - 3 in.) of

inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10 in.) from your driver airbag pro-

vides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from

the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 250

mm (10 in.) away now, you can change your driving position in several

ways:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the

pedals comfortably.

• Slightly recline the back of the seat.

Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 250 mm

(10 in.) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply

by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of

your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm,

non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.

• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the

airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recommended above, while still maintain-

ing control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instru-

ment panel controls.

117

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

SRS airbag precautions

The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and

can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very

close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the air-

bag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits

upright.

Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or

seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too

small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint

system. Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be

placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear

seats are the safest for infants and children. (P. 121)

Do not sit on the edge of the seat or

lean against the dashboard.

Do not allow a child to stand in front of

the SRS front passenger airbag unit or

sit on the knees of a front passenger.

Do not drive the vehicle while the

driver or passenger have items resting

on their knees.

118

1-7. Safety information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

SRS airbag precautions

Do not lean against the door, the roof

side rail or the front, side and rear pil-

lars.

Do not allow anyone to kneel on the

passenger seat toward the door or put

their head or hands outside the vehicle.

Do not attach anything to or lean any-

thing against areas such as the dash-

board, steering wheel pad and lower

portion of the instrument panel.

These items can become projectiles

when SRS driver, front passenger and

knee airbags deploy.

Do not attach anything to areas such

as the door, windshield glass, side

door glass, front and rear pillars, roof

side rail or assist grip. (Except for the

speed limit label P. 502)

Do not hang coat hangers or other hard

objects on the coat hooks. All of these

items could become projectiles and

seriously injure or kill you, should the

SRS curtain shield airbag deploy.

119

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

SRS airbag precautions

If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy,

be sure to remove it.

Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side air-

bags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags.

Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS air-

bag components shown on P. 111.

Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.

Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS air-

bags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.

If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a

door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do

so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.

If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel

pad and front pillar garnish, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced

by any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

120

1-7. Safety information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifica-

tions without consulting any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional.

The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing

death or serious injury.

Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags.

Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel,

instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear

pillars or roof side rail.

Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the

occupant compartment.

Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kan-

garoo bar etc.).

Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system.

Installation of electronic devices such as an RF-transmitter or CD players.

Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability

121

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Child restraint systems

Points to remember

Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is

safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.

Choose a child restraint system appropriate to the age and size of

the child.

For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the

child restraint system.

General installation instructions are provided in this manual.

(P. 130)

If child restraint system regulations exist in the country where

you reside, please contact any authorized Lexus dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional for

the child restraint system installation.

Lexus recommends that you use a child restraint system which

conforms to the regulation “ECE No.44”.

Types of child restraints

Child restraint systems are classified into the following 5 groups

according to the regulation ECE No.44.

Group 0: Up to 10 kg (22 lb.) (0 - 9 months)

Group 0+: Up to 13 kg (28 lb.) (0 - 2 years)

Group I: 9 to 18 kg (20 to 39 lb.) (9 months - 4 years)

Group II: 15 to 25 kg (34 to 55 lb.) (4 years - 7 years)

Group III: 22 to 36 kg (49 to 79 lb.) (6 years - 12 years)

Lexus strongly urges the use of child restraint systems.

122

1-7. Safety information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

In this owner's manual, the following popular 3 types of child

restraint systems that can be secured with the seat belts are

explained.

123

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Baby seat

Equal to Group 0 and 0+ of

ECE No.44

Child seat

Equal to Group 0+ and I of ECE

No.44

Junior seat

Equal to Group II and III of

ECE No.44

124

1-7. Safety information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Child restraint system suitability for various seating positions

Provided information in the table shows your child restraint system

suitability for various seating positions.

Front passenger seat

Rear seat

Airbag manual on-off

switch

Off

Outboard Center

Up to 10 kg (22 lb.)

(0 - 9 months)

Never put L1 L1 U

Up to 13 kg (28 lb.)

(0 - 2 years)

Never put L1 L1 U

9 to 18 kg

(20 to 39 lb.)

(9 months - 4 years)

L2 L2 U

II, III

15 to 36 kg

(34 to 79 lb.)

(4 - 12 years)

L3 L3 U

Mass groups

Seating posi-

125

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Key of letters inserted in the above table:

U: Suitable for “universal” category child restraint system

approved for the use in this mass group.

L1: Suitable for “LEXUS BABY-SAFE (0 to 13 kg [0 to 28 lb.])”

approved for the use in this mass group.

L2: Suitable for “LEXUS DUO+ (without ISOFIX, 9 to 18 kg [20

to 39 lb.])” approved for the use in this mass group.

L3: Suitable for “LEXUS KID (15 to 36 kg [34 to 79 lb.])”

approved for the use in this mass group.

X: Not suitable seat position for children in this mass group.

The child restraint systems mentioned in the table may not be

available outside of the EU area.

Other child restraint systems different from the systems mentioned

in the table can be used, but the suitability of the systems must be

carefully checked with the child restraint system manufacturer and

retailer.

126

1-7. Safety information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Child restraint system suitability for various seating positions

(with ISOFIX rigid anchor)

Provided information in the table shows your child restraint system

suitability for various seating positions.

Mass groups Size class Fixture

Vehicle ISOFIX

positions

Rear outboard

Carrycot

ISO/L1

ISO/L2

(1) X

Up to 10 kg (22

lb.)

(0 - 9 months)

ISO/R1

(1) X

Up to 13 kg (28

lb.)

(0 - 2 years)

ISO/R1

ISO/R2

ISO/R3

(1) X

9 to 18 kg

(20 to 39 lb.)

(9 months - 4

years)

ISO/R2

ISO/R3

ISO/F2

IUF

ISO/F2X

ISO/F3

(1) X

II, III

15 to 36 kg

(34 to 79 lb.)

(4 12 ears)

(1) X

127

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

(1) For CRS which do not carry the ISO/XX size class identifica-

tion (A to G), for the applicable mass group, the car manufac-

turer shall indicate the vehicle specific ISOFIX child restraint

system(s) recommended for each position.

Key of letters inserted in the above table:

IUF:Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of uni-

versal category approved for use in this mass group.

X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint sys-

tems in this mass group and/or this size class.

The child restraint systems mentioned in the table may not be

available outside of the EU area.

Other child restraint systems different from the systems mentioned

in the table can be used, but the suitability of the systems must be

carefully checked with the child restraint system manufacturer and

retailer.

128

1-7. Safety information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

When installing the child restraint system on the front passenger seat

Selecting an appropriate child restraint system

Get an appropriate child restraint system for the child. If a child is too large

for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the vehicle's

seat belt.

(P. 74)

CAUTION

Using a child restraint system

The use of a child restraint system not suitable for the vehicle may not prop-

erly secure the infant or child, resulting in serious injury or even death.

Child restraint precautions

For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child

must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system

depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is

not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be

crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.

This may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sud-

den stop or an accident.

Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that con-

forms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to acci-

dent statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat

than in the front seat.

When you have to use a child restraint

system in the front passenger seat, adjust

the seatback to the most upright position

and adjust the seat cushion to the upper-

most position.

129

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Child restraint precautions

Never use a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat

when the airbag manual on-off switch is on. (P. 140)

In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front pas-

senger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child.

A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front pas-

senger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back

as possible, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with consid-

erable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously

injured.

Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body

against the door or the area of the seat, front pillar, rear pillar or roof side

rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if

the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side

airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause

death or serious injury to the child.

Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided

by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly

secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury

to the child in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.

When children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes

twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious inju-

ries that could result in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used

to cut the belt.

When the child restraint system is not in use

Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is

not in use. Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compart-

ment.

If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the

vehicle or store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring

passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

130

1-7. Safety information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Installing child restraints

Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly

secure child restraints to the rear seats using a seat belt or a ISOFIX

rigid anchor (ISOFIX child restraint system). Attach the top strap

when installing a child restraint.

Installation with a seat belt

(P. 131)

ISOFIX rigid anchors (ISO-

FIX child restraint system)

(P. 134)

These exclusive fixing bars

are provided for the outside

rear seats. (Buttons display-

ing the location of the

anchorages are attached to

the seats.)

Anchor bracket

(for top strap) (P. 134)

Anchor brackets are provided

for all rear seats.

131

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Installing child restraints using a seat belt

Rear facing Baby seat/child seat

Place the child seat on the rear

seat facing the rear of the vehi-

cle.

Run the seat belt through the

child restraint system and insert

the plate into the buckle until a

click sound is heard. Make sure

that the belt is not twisted.

Follow the directions given in

the child restraint system instal-

lation manual and fix the child

restraint system securely in

place.

If your child restraint system is

not equipped with a lock-off (a

seat belt locking feature),

secure the child restraint system

using a locking clip.

After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to

ensure that it is installed securely.

STEP 1

STEP 2

132

1-7. Safety information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Forward facing Child seat

Place the child seat on the seat

facing the front of the vehicle.

Run the seat belt through the

child restraint system and insert

the plate into the buckle until a

click sound is heard. Make sure

that the belt is not twisted.

Follow the directions given in

the child restraint system instal-

lation manual and fix the child

restraint system securely in

place.

If your child restraint system is

not equipped with a lock-off (a

seat belt locking feature),

secure the child restraint system

using a locking clip.

After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to

ensure that it is installed securely.

STEP 1

STEP 2

133

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Junior seat

Place the junior seat on the seat

facing the front of the vehicle.

Sit the child in the junior seat.

Fit the seat belt to the junior

seat according to the manufac-

turer's instructions and insert

the plate into the buckle. Make

sure that the belt is not twisted.

Check that the shoulder belt is

correctly positioned over the

child's shoulder, and that the lap

belt is as low as possible. (P.

74)

STEP 1

STEP 2

134

1-7. Safety information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Installation with ISOFIX rigid anchors (ISOFIX child restraint sys-

tem)

Flip the cover, and latch the

buckles onto the exclusive fix-

ing bars.

If the child restraint has a top

strap, the top strap should be

latched onto the anchor bracket.

Child restraint systems with a top strap

Secure the child restraint using

a seat belt or ISOFIX rigid

anchors and lock the head

restraint in place at the original

position.

STEP 1

135

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Open the anchor bracket cover,

latch the hook onto the anchor

bracket and tighten the top

strap.

Make sure the top strap is

securely latched.

STEP 2

When restraining a child restraint system

You need a locking clip to restraint the child restraint system. Follow the

instructions provided by the manufacturer of the system. If your child

restraint system does not provide a locking clip, you can purchase the fol-

lowing item from any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional.

Locking clip for child restraint system

(Part No. 73119-22010)

136

1-7. Safety information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

When installing a child restraint system

Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual

and fix the child restraint system securely in place.

If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other

passengers may be injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking,

sudden swerving or an accident.

If the driver's seat interferes with the

child restraint system and prevents it

from being attached correctly, attach

the child restraint system to the right-

hand rear seat (left-hand drive vehicles)

or the left-hand rear seat (right-hand

drive vehicles).

When installing a forward facing or

junior child seat on the front passenger

seat, move the seat as far back as possi-

ble.

Failing to do so may result in death or

serious injury if the airbags deploy

(inflate).

137

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

When installing a child restraint system

Never use a rear-facing child restraint

system on the front passenger seat

when the airbag manual on-off switch

is on.

(P. 140)

The force of the rapid inflation of the

front passenger airbag can cause death

or serious injury to children in the

event of an accident.

For Russia Except for Russia: A warning label on

the passenger side instrument panel

reminds you not to install a rear-facing

child restraint system on the front pas-

senger seat.

For Russia: There is a sticker on the

passenger side of the instrument panel

and a label on both sides of the passen-

ger side sun visor, both indicating it is

forbidden to attach a rear-facing child

restraint system to the front passenger

seat.

Details of the label on the passenger

side sun visor are shown in the illustra-

tions below The label includes infor-

138

1-7. Safety information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

When installing a child restraint system

For Russia

If child restraint system regulations exist in the country where you reside,

please contact any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional for the child restraint system installa-

tion.

When a junior seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is

positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be

kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's

shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event

of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes

twisted around a child’s neck, choking or other serious injuries may result

in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used

to cut the belt.

139

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

When installing a child restraint system

Make sure the outside rear seat head restraints are not in the folded posi-

tion.

Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not

twisted.

Push and pull the child seat from side to side and forward to be sure it is

secure.

Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system

manufacturer.

To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors

When using the lower anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects

around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child

restraint. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may

cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of

a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

140

1-7. Safety information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Airbag manual on/off system

Deactivating the front passenger airbags

This system deactivates the front passenger airbag, front passenger

knee airbag and front passenger side airbag.

Only deactivate the airbags when using a child restraint system on the

front passenger seat.

“PASSENGER AIRBAG”

indicator

This indicator turns on when

the airbag system is on.

(Only when the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch is in

IGNITION ON mode.)

Airbag manual on-off

switch

141

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Insert the mechanical key into

the cylinder and rotate to the

“OFF” position.

The “OFF” indicator turns on.

(Only when the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch is in

IGNITION ON mode.)

“PASSENGER AIRBAG” indicator information

If any of the following problems occurs, it is possible that there is a mal-

function in the system. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

Neither “ON” nor “OFF” comes on.

The indicator does not change when the airbag manual on-off switch is

switched to “ON” or “OFF”.

CAUTION

When installing a child restraint system

For safety reasons, always install the child restraint system in a rear seat. In

the event that the rear seat cannot be used, the front seat can be used as long

as the airbag manual on-off system is set to off.

If the airbag manual on-off system is left on, the strong impact of the airbag

deployment (inflation) may cause serious injury or even death.

When a child restraint system is not installed on the front passenger seat

Ensure that the airbag manual on-off system is set to on.

If it is left off, the airbag may not deploy in the event of an accident, which

may result in serious injury or even death.

When driving

141

2-1. Driving procedures

Driving the vehicle........... 142

Engine (ignition) switch... 153

Automatic transmission ... 158

Manual transmission........ 165

Turn signal lever .............. 167

Parking brake ................... 168

Horn ................................. 170

2-2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters........... 171

Indicators and warning

lights .............................. 177

Multi-information display 181

2-3. Operating the lights and wind-

shield wipers

Headlight switch.............. 186

Fog light switch ............... 190

Windshield wipers and

washer............................ 191

Headlight cleaner switch . 197

2-4. Using other driving

systems

Cruise control .................. 198

Dynamic radar cruise

control............................ 202

Lexus parking

assist-sensor................... 217

Driving assist systems ..... 223

PCS (Pre-Crash Safety

system)........................... 229

2-5. Driving information

Cargo and luggage........... 237

Winter driving tips........... 239

Trailer towing .................. 242

142

IS250/220d/200d_EE

2-1. Driving procedures

Driving the vehicle

The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving.

Starting the engine (P. 156)

Driving

Automatic transmission

With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.

(P. 161)

Release the parking brake. (P. 171)

Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the

accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

Manual transmission

While depressing the clutch pedal, shift the shift lever

into 1. (P. 168)

Release the parking brake. (P. 171)

Gradually release the clutch pedal. At the same time,

gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the

vehicle.

Stopping

Automatic transmission

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

If necessary, set the parking brake.

When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time,

shift the shift lever to P or N. (P. 161)

Manual transmission

While depressing the clutch pedal, depress the brake

pedal.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

143

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Starting on a steep uphill

Automatic transmission

Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to D.

Gently depress the accelerator pedal.

Release the parking brake.

Manual transmission

With the parking brake firmly set and the clutch pedal fully

depressed, shift the shift lever into 1.

Lightly depress the accelerator pedal at the same time as

gradually releasing the clutch pedal.

Release the parking brake.

Parking the vehicle

Automatic transmission

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

Set the parking brake. (P. 171)

Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 161)

Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to stop the

engine.

Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic

key on your person.

Manual transmission

While depressing the clutch pedal, depress the brake

pedal.

Set the parking brake. (P. 171)

Shift the shift lever into N. (P. 168)

Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to stop the

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

144

2-1. Driving procedures

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Starting off on a hill (vehicles with an automatic transmission)

Hill-start assist control will operate. (P. 223)

Driving in the rain

Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the

windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.

Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be

especially slippery.

Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain,

because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road sur-

face, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.

Engine speed while driving

In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driv-

ing. This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implemen-

tation to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.

The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill

When the accelerator pedal is released

Breaking in your new Lexus

To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recom-

mended to observe:

For the first 300 km (186 miles):

Avoid sudden stops.

For the first 800 km (500 miles):

Do not tow a trailer.

For the first 1000 km (621 miles):

• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.

• Avoid sudden acceleration.

• Do not drive continuously in the low gears.

• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.

145

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Drum-in-disc type parking brake system

Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of

brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or when-

ever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have any authorized

Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional, perform the bedding down operation.

 Idling time before engine stop (IS220d and IS200d)

To prevent damage to the turbocharger, allow the engine to idle immediately

after high-speed driving or hill climbing.

Operating your vehicle in a foreign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the avail-

ability of the correct fuel. (P. 538)

Driving condition Idling time

Normal city driving Not necessary

High-speed driv-

ing

Constant speed of approx.

80 km/h (50 mph) Approximately 20

seconds

Constant speed of approx.

100 km/h (63 mph) Approximately 1 min-

ute

Steep hill driving or continuous driving at 100

km/h (63 mph) or more (race track driving,

etc )

Approximately 2

minutes

146

2-1. Driving procedures

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

When starting the vehicle

With automatic transmission vehicles, always keep your foot on the brake

pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from

creeping.

When driving the vehicle

Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accel-

erator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.

• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake

pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident

that could result in death or serious injury.

• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a diffi-

culty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.

• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the

vehicle only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator

pedals properly.

• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake

pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, result-

ing in an accident.

Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materi-

als.

With automatic transmission vehicles, do not let the vehicle roll back-

wards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while

the shift lever is in R.

Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering

performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.

If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and

check that the trunk is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can

cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious

health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional, immedi-

ately.

147

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

On vehicles with an automatic transmission, do not shift the shift lever to

P while the vehicle is moving.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle

control.

Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle

control.

Do not shift the shift lever to D (vehicles with an automatic transmission)

or 1 (vehicles with a manual transmission) while the vehicle is moving

backward.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle

control.

Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the

engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is

selected.

During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off

while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the

power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult

to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as

it is safe to do so.

However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible

to stop the vehicle in the normal way: P. 531

Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving

down a steep hill.

Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose

effectiveness. (P. 161)

When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking

brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing

an accident.

Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or

outside rear view mirrors while driving.

Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents

that may result in death or serious injury.

Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their bod-

ies are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.

148

2-1. Driving procedures

IS250/220d/200d_EE

149

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

150

2-1. Driving procedures

IS250/220d/200d_EE

When driving on slippery road surfaces

Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and

reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.

Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by up-

shifting or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an

accident.

After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make

sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent

the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are

wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, result-

ing in an accident.

When shifting the shift lever

With automatic transmission vehicles, be careful not to shift the shift lever

with the accelerator pedal depressed.

This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may

cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear indicators)

Have the brake pads checked and replaced by any authorized Lexus dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional, as soon as

possible.

Rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.

Front brake only: Moderate levels of brake pad and disc wear allow

enhanced front braking power. As a result, the discs may wear more quickly

than conventional brake discs. Therefore, when replacing the brake pads,

Lexus recommends that you also have the thickness of the discs measured.

It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads

and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.

When the vehicle is stopped

Do not race the engine.

If the vehicle is in any gear other than P (vehicles with an automatic trans-

mission only) or N the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly,

and may cause an accident.

Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.

If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space

and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

151

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

With automatic transmission: In order to prevent accidents due to the

vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while the

engine is running, and apply the parking brake as necessary.

If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused

by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake

pedal and securely apply the parking brake as needed.

Avoid revving or racing the engine.

Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause

the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible

material is nearby.

When the vehicle is parked

Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in

the vehicle when it is in the sun.

Doing so may result in the following.

• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a

fire.

• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and

plastic material of eye glasses to deform or crack.

• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the

interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehi-

cle's electrical components.

Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P (vehicles with an

automatic transmission only), stop the engine and lock the vehicle.

Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.

Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately

after turning the engine off.

Doing so may cause burns.

Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it

is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is

running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to

death or a serious health hazard.

152

2-1. Driving procedures

IS250/220d/200d_EE

153

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Exhaust gases

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and

odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health haz-

ard.

If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed

area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.

This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack

caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure

to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by any authorized Lexus dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional. Failure to

do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a

serious health hazard.

When taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift

lever or depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire

due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly

ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to

death or a serious health hazard.

When braking the vehicle

When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously. Braking distance

increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side of the vehicle

to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may not

securely hold the vehicle.

If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other

vehicles closely and avoid downhills or sharp turns that require braking.

In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the

pedal than usual. Braking distance may also increase.

Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.

Each push on the pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.

The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: if one of the

systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal

should be depressed more firmly than usual and braking distance becomes

longer.

Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your

brakes fixed immediately.

154

2-1. Driving procedures

IS250/220d/200d_EE

NOTICE

When driving the vehicle

Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during

driving. If the brake pedal is depressed while driving with the accelerator

pedal depressed, driving torque may be restrained.

With automatic transmission vehicles

Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake ped-

als together to hold the vehicle on a hill.

With manual transmission vehicles

Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving.

Doing so may cause clutch trouble.

Do not use any gears other than the first gear when starting off and mov-

ing forward.

Doing so may damage the clutch.

Do not use the clutch to hold the vehicle when stopping on an uphill

grade.

Doing so may damage the clutch.

When parking the vehicle

With automatic transmission vehicles, always put the shift lever in P. Failure

to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate sud-

denly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.

Avoiding damage to vehicle parts

Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for

a long time.

Doing so may damage the power steering motor.

When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid

damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.

IS220d and IS200d: Make sure to idle the engine immediately after high-

speed driving or hill climbing. Stop the engine only after the turbocharger

has cooled down.

Failure to do so may cause damage to the turbocharger.

155

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

NOTICE

If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering

wheel firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.

It may be difficult to control your vehicle.

The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.

The vehicle will behave abnormally.

Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (P. 485, 497)

When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may

cause the following serious damage to the vehicle.

Engine stalling

Short in electrical components

Engine damage caused by water immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be

sure to have any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-

fied and equipped professional check the following.

Brake function

Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, trans-

mission, differential, etc.

Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints

(where possible) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

156

2-1. Driving procedures

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Engine (ignition) switch

Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key

on your person starts the engine or changes “ENGINE START STOP”

switch modes.

Starting the engine

Automatic transmission

Check that the parking brake is set.

Check that the shift lever is set in P.

Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns green.

Press the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch.

The engine will crank until it

starts or for up to 30 seconds,

whichever is less.

Continue depressing the

brake pedal until the engine

is completely started.

The engine can be started

from any “ENGINE START

STOP” switch mode.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

157

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Manual transmission

Check that the parking brake is set.

Check that the shift lever is set in N.

Firmly depress the clutch pedal.

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns green.

Press the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch.

indicator turns on. The

engine begins starting after

the indicator light goes out.

The engine will crank until it

starts or for up to 30 seconds,

whichever is less.

Continue depressing the

clutch pedal until the engine

is completely started.

The engine can be started

from any “ENGINE START

STOP” switch mode.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

158

2-1. Driving procedures

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode

Modes can be changed by pressing the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch with the brake pedal (vehicles with an automatic

transmission) or clutch pedal (vehicles with a manual transmis-

sion) released. (The mode changes each time the switch is

pressed.)

OFF*

The emergency flashers can

be used.

ACCESSORY mode

Some electrical components

such as the audio system can

be used.

The “ENGINE START

STOP” switch indicator turns

amber.

IGNITION ON mode

All electrical components can

be used.

The “ENGINE START

STOP” switch indicator turns

amber.

*:If the shift lever is in a posi-

tion other than P when turn-

ing off the engine, the

“ENGINE START STOP”

159

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

If the engine does not start

The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 96)

When the steering lock cannot be released

When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator flashes in amber

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by any

authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional, immediately.

Auto power off function

If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than an hour with the

shift lever in P (vehicles with an automatic transmission), the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch will automatically turn OFF.

Electronic key battery depletion

P. 44

When the electronic key battery is discharged

P. 431

Conditions affecting operation

P. 42

Note for the entry function

P. 46

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch

indicator will flash in green and a mes-

sage will be shown on the multi-informa-

tion display. Press the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch again while turning the

steering wheel left and right.

160

2-1. Driving procedures

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

When starting the engine

Always start the engine while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not press the

accelerator while starting the engine under any circumstances.

Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

Stopping the engine in an emergency

If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle,

push and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for more than 3 sec-

onds.

However, do not touch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while driving

except in an emergency. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause

loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will

be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should

pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

NOTICE

To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or

IGNITION ON mode for long periods without the engine running.

When starting the engine

Do not race a cold engine.

If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine

checked immediately.

161

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Automatic transmission

Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.

Shifting the shift lever

While the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNI-

TION ON mode, depress the brake pedal and move the

shift lever.

Shift position uses

*: To improve fuel consumption and reduce noises, set the shift lever

Shift position Function

PParking the vehicle or starting the engine

RReversing

NNeutral

DNormal driving*

SS mode driving (P. 165)

: If equipped

162

2-1. Driving procedures

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Selecting a driving mode

The following patterns can be selected to suit current driving

and operating conditions.

Power mode

For powerful acceleration

and driving in mountain-

ous regions.

Normal mode

Snow mode

For accelerating and driv-

ing on slippery road sur-

faces, such as on snow.

Press “SNOW” to return to

normal mode.

163

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Selecting shift ranges in the D position (if equipped)

To drive using temporary shift range selection, operate the “-” shift

paddle switch. The shift range can then be selected by operating

the “-” and “+” shift paddle switches. Changing the shift range

allows restriction of the upper limit of the gears to be used, pre-

venting unnecessary upshifting and enabling the level of engine

braking force to be selected.

Higher shift range

Lower shift range

The selected shift range, from 1

to 6, will be displayed in the

meter cluster.

To return to normal D position

driving, the “+” shift paddle

switch must be held down for a

period of time.

164

2-1. Driving procedures

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Shift ranges and their functions

A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than a

higher shift range.

Shift range Function

6Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 6

according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.

5Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 5

according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.

4Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 4

according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.

3Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 3

according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.

2Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 2

according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.

1Setting the gear at 1.

165

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Changing shift ranges in S mode

To enter S mode, shift the shift lever to the S position. The shift

range can then be selected by operating the “-” and “+” shift pad-

dle switches (if equipped) or the shift lever. Changing the shift

range allows restriction of the upper limit of the gears to be used,

preventing unnecessary upshifting and enabling the level of engine

braking force to be selected.

Higher shift range

Lower shift range

The selected shift range, from 1

to 6, will be displayed in the

meter cluster.

The initial shift range in S mode is automatically set to 5 or 4

according to vehicle speed. However, the initial shift range may be

set to 3 or 2 if the AI-SHIFT has operated while the shift lever was

in the D position.

(P. 167)

Shift ranges and their functions

P. 164

166

2-1. Driving procedures

IS250/220d/200d_EE

When the “-” shift paddle switch is operated in the D position

When the “-” shift paddle switch is operated in the D position, a shift range

will be automatically selected. The highest gear of the first shift range will

be one gear lower than the gear in use during normal D position driving.

Automatic deactivation of shift range selection in the D position

Shift range selection in the D position will be deactivated in the following

situations:

When the vehicle comes to a stop

When range 6 is selected and the accelerator pedal is depressed

If the accelerator pedal is depressed for more than a certain period of

time

To protect automatic transmission

A function is adopted that automatically selects a higher shift range when

the fluid temperature is high.

Gear range display when driving

The current gear is displayed on the multi-information display. (P. 184)

Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer

To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may

sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be

possible even when the shift lever or shift paddle switch is operated. (The

warning buzzer will sound twice.)

When driving with the cruise control system or dynamic radar cruise control

system

Engine braking will not occur during shift range selection in the D position

or S mode, even when downshifting to range 5 or 4. (P. 198, 202)

Snow mode automatic deactivation

Snow mode is automatically deactivated if the “ENGINE START STOP”

switch is turned off after driving in snow mode.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

P. 514

167

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

If does not come on even after shifting the shift lever to S

This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have

the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional, immediately.

(In this situation, the vehicle will operate as if the shift lever is in D.)

AI-SHIFT

The AI-SHIFT automatically shifts the gear to the suitable position accord-

ing to the driver performance and driving conditions.

The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D posi-

tion. However, operating the “-” paddle shift switch will restrict the func-

tion’s operation. (Shifting the shift lever to the S position cancels the

function.)

CAUTION

When driving on slippery road surfaces

Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in

the vehicle skidding to the side or spinning.

168

2-1. Driving procedures

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Manual transmission

Shifting the shift lever

Fully depress the clutch

pedal before operating the

shift lever, and then release it

slowly.

Shifting the shift lever into R

Shift the shift lever into the R

position while lifting up the

ring section.

: If equipped

169

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Maximum downshifting speed

Adhere to the downshifting speeds in the following table in order to prevent

over-revving the engine.

km/h (mph)

Shift position Maximum speed

146 (28)

291 (56)

3151 (93)

4198 (122)

170

2-1. Driving procedures

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Turn signal lever

Turn signals can be operated when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

If the indicators flash faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned

out.

Right turn

Left turn

Move and hold the lever

partway to signal a lane

change

The right hand signal will

flash until you release the

lever.

Move and hold the lever

partway to signal a lane

change

The left hand signal will flash

until you release the lever.

171

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Parking brake

Usage in winter time

See “Winter driving tips” for parking brake usage in winter time. (P. 239)

Vehicles with an automatic transmission

Sets the parking brake*

(Depressing the pedal again

releases the parking brake.)

*:Fully depress the parking

brake pedal with your left

foot while depressing the

brake pedal with your right

foot.

Vehicles with a manual transmission

Sets the parking brake

Fully set the parking brake while depressing the brake pedal.

Releases the parking brake

Slightly raise the lever and lower it completely while pressing the

172

2-1. Driving procedures

IS250/220d/200d_EE

NOTICE

Before driving

Fully release the parking brake.

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components

overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake

wear.

173

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Horn

After adjusting the steering wheel (vehicles with manually adjustable steer-

ing wheel)

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.

The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked. (P.

79)

To sound the horn, press on

or close to the mark.

171

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

2-2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters

The units used on the speedometer, tachometer and fuel gauge display

may differ depending on the model/type.

The following gauges, meters and display illuminate when the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

Speedometer

Displays the vehicle speed.

Multi-information display

P. 181

Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.

Tacho indicator

When the set engine speed is reached, this ring-shaped indicator

comes on in yellow. The indicator comes on in red when the engine

speed reaches a dangerous range.

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature.

172

2-2. Instrument cluster

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Instrument panel light control

The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.

Darker

Brighter

Odometer and trip meter

Odometer:Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

Trip meter:Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since

the meter was last reset. Trip meters “A” and “B” can be

used to record and display different distances inde-

pendently.

Speed indicator

When the set speed is reached while driving, this ring-shaped indi-

cator comes on in yellow. The indicator comes on in red when the

vehicle speed reaches the dangerous range.

Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.

Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button

Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pushing and

173

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Speed and tacho indicators

Turning the indicator on/off

Bring up the satellite switch

mode on the multi-information

display.

Press “”, “” or the “ON/

OFF” button.

Select the item whose setting is

to be changed.

Press “” or “” to display the

item whose setting is to be

changed.

Change the settings.

Press the “ON/OFF” button to

change the settings.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

174

2-2. Instrument cluster

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Changing the indicator setting

The satellite switch can be used to change the set speed at which

the yellow speed or tacho indicator ring comes on.

The setting can be made only when the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the vehicle is

stopped.

Push “” or “” to select the speed or tacho indicator set mode.

( ) Turn the speed or tacho indicator to “OFF” and then “ON” by

pushing the “ON/OFF” button. ( )

After one second, the mode

enters the indicator setting

mode.

The speedometer or tachometer

needle moves to the previously

set speed.

STEP 1

175

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Push “” or “” within 6 seconds of the speedometer or tachome-

ter needle moving to change the setting of the desired speed, then

turn the indicator mode to “ON” by pushing the “ON/OFF” button.

Pushing and holding the switch changes values at a faster rate.

If the satellite switch is not operated for some time, the multi-informa-

tion display returns to its previously displayed content.

The yellow indicator is displayed to indicate that the desired speed

has been set.

STEP 2

176

2-2. Instrument cluster

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Speed indicator display conditions and vehicle speed setting range

Vehicle speed setting range:

Right-hand drive vehicles:

Approximately 50 to 160 km/h

(Approximately 30 to 100 mph)

Left-hand drive vehicles:

Approximately 50 to 200 km/h

(Approximately 30 to 125 mph)

When the maximum speed is selected, the speed indicator comes on in red.

Tacho indicator display conditions and engine speed setting range

Engine rpm setting range:

IS250: Approximately 2000 to 6500 rpm (r/min)

IS220d and IS200d: Approximately 2000 to 5100 rpm (r/min)

When the maximum rpm is selected, the tacho indicator comes on in red.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the engine and its components

Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which

indicates the maximum engine speed.

The engine may be overheating if the temperature gauge is in the red zone

(H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check

the engine after it has cooled completely. (P. 525)

177

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Indicators and warning lights

The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center

panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.

Instrument cluster

The units used on the speedometer, tachometer and fuel gauge display,

indicators and warning lights may differ depending on the model/type.

Center panel

178

2-2. Instrument cluster

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Indicators

The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the

vehicle’s various systems.

Turn signal indicator

(P. 170)

(vehicles

with an

automatic

transmis-

sion)

“ECT SNOW” indica-

tor

(P. 162)

Headlight high beam

indicator (P. 186)

(vehicles

with an

automatic

transmis-

sion)

“ECT PWR” indicator

(P. 162)

Tail light indicator

(P. 186)

(if

equipped)

Cruise control indicator

(P. 198, 202)

Front fog light indicator

(P. 190)

(if

equipped)

Lexus parking assist-

sensor indicator (P.

217)

Rear fog light indicator

(P. 190) Slip indicator

(P. 224)

(vehicles with an automatic

VSC off indicator

(P. 224)

*1, 2

179

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

*1:These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is

turned to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is

being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or

after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a

light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the

vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional, for details.

*2:The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating

(if

equipped)

Daytime running light

system off indicator

(P. 188)

SRS airbag on-off indi-

cator (P. 140)

(vehicles

with a man-

ual trans-

mission)

Engine preheating indi-

cator (P. 156)

180

2-2. Instrument cluster

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

If a safety system warning light does not come on

Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not

come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are

not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death

or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional, immedi-

ately if this occurs.

Warning lights

Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the

vehicle’s systems. (P. 467)

*:These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is

turned to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is

being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or

after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a

light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the

vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or

(vehicles

with a

manual

transmis-

sion)

(if equipped)

(for

driver) (for front

passen-

ger)

181

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Multi-information display

The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of

driving-related data, including the current outside air temperature.

Trip information (P.

182)

Displays driving range, fuel

consumption and other cruis-

ing-related information.

Lexus parking assist-sen-

sor display (if equipped)

Automatically displayed

when using Lexus parking

assist-sensor.

Satellite switch mode dis-

play (P. 365)

This switch is used to config-

ure various function settings.

Dynamic radar cruise con-

trol display (if equipped)

(P. 202)

Automatically displayed

when using dynamic radar

cruise control.

Warning messages

(P. 473)

Automatically displayed

182

2-2. Instrument cluster

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Trip information

Display items can be switched

by pushing the “DISP” switch.

Outside temperature

Driving range

Displays the outside air temperature.

The temperature range that can be displayed is

from -40C (-40F) to 50C (122F).

When the temperature drops to 3C (37F), the

digits of the display will flash for 10 seconds.

Displays the estimated maximum distance that

can be driven with the quantity of fuel remain-

ing.

• This distance is computed based on your aver-

age fuel consumption. As a result, the actual

distance that can be driven may differ from that

displayed.

• When only a small amount of fuel is added to

the tank, the display may not be updated.

When refueling, turn the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch off. If the vehicle is refueled

without turning the “ENGINE START STOP”

switch off, the display may not be updated.

183

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Average fuel consumption

Average fuel consumption after refueling

Current fuel consumption

Average vehicle speed

Displays the average fuel consumption since the

function was reset.

• The function can be reset by pushing the

“DISP” switch for longer than one second when

the average fuel consumption is displayed.

• Use the displayed average fuel consumption as

a reference.

Displays the average fuel consumption since the

vehicle was last refueled.

Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a

reference.

Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.

Displays the average vehicle speed since the

engine was started or the function was reset.

The function can be reset by pushing the “DISP”

switch for longer than one second when the aver-

age vehicle speed is displayed.

184

2-2. Instrument cluster

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Gear position display

(vehicles with an automatic transmission only)

Indicates the current gear, and the range of gears

that is available when the shift lever is in the D

or S position. The gear range is shown by the

number of dots () and the current gear is shown

as a number. The transmission automatically

selects the gears within the driver selected gear

range.

In the illustration to the left, a range of 6 available

gears (1 through 6) has been selected by the driver.

(The shift lever is in the D or S position with 6

ranges enabled.) It is possible for the transmission

to automatically select between all 6 of the gears.

In this case, the transmission has selected third

gear.

System check display

After switching the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON

mode, “CHECK” is displayed while system operation is checked. When the

system check is complete, “COMPLETED” is displayed before returning to

the normal screen.

Outside temperature display

In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be dis-

played, or the display may take longer than normal to change.

When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 20 km/h [12 mph])

When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit

of a garage, tunnel, etc.)

185

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

When the temperature of the display is extremely low

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal

information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display

monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.

For example, there is a lag between the driver’s downshifting and the new

gear number appearing on the display. In this case, wait until the display

changes and take care not to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive

engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

186

IS250/220d/200d_EE

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Headlight switch

Turning on the high beam headlights

With the headlights on, push

the lever forward to turn on

the high beams.

Pull the lever back to the center

position to turn the high beams

off.

Pull the lever toward you to

turn on the high beams.

Release to turn them off. You

can flash the high beams with

the headlights on or off.

The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

Off

The front position,

tail, license plate

and instrument

panel lights turn on.

The headlights and

all lights listed

above turn on.

The headlights and

front position lights

turn on and off auto-

matically

(when the

“ENGINE START

STOP” switch is in

IGNITION ON

187

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Manual headlight leveling dial (vehicles without discharge head-

lights)

The level of the headlights can be adjusted according to the num-

ber of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle.

Raises the level of the head-

lights

Lowers the level of the head-

lights

Guide to dial settings

Occupancy and luggage load conditions Dial position

Occupants Luggage load

Driver None 0

Driver and front

passenger None 0

All seats occupied None 2

All seats occupied Full luggage loading 3

Driver Full luggage loading 4

188

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Daytime running light system (if equipped)

Vehicles with halogen headlights

To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the head-

lights turn on automatically (at a reduced intensity) whenever

the engine is started. Daytime running lights are not designed for

use at night.

Vehicles with discharge headlights

To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the front

position lights turn on automatically (at a increased intensity)

whenever the engine is started. Daytime running lights are not

designed for use at night.

Deactivating daytime running light (vehicles with discharge

headlights)

How to switch: P. 365

“DRL OFF” turns on when the daytime running light is deactivated.

Headlight control sensor

The sensor may not function properly if

an object is placed on the sensor, or any-

thing that blocks the sensor is affixed to

the windshield.

Doing so interferes with the sensor

detecting the level of ambient light and

may cause the automatic headlight sys-

tem to malfunction

189

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Automatic light off system

This system is active when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNI-

TION ON mode and the headlight lever is in any position other than .

When the light switch is in : The headlights turn off automatically

if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY

mode or turned OFF.

When the light switch is in “AUTO”: The headlights and tail lights turn

off automatically if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to

ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF and the driver's door is opened.

Even if a door other than the driver's door is opened, the automatic light

off system will not operate.

To turn the lights on again, switch to IGNITION ON mode, or turn the light

switch off once and then back to or .

Light reminder buzzer

A buzzer sounds when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned OFF

or switched to ACCESSORY mode and the driver's door is opened while the

lights are turned on.

Automatic headlight leveling system (vehicles with discharge headlights)

The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the num-

ber of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the

headlights do not interfere with other road users.

Customization that can be configured at any authorized Lexus dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional

Settings of the light sensor sensitivity can be changed.

(Customizable features P. 556)

NOTICE

To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not run-

ning.

190

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Fog light switch

The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such

as in rain or fog. The fog lights can be used when the headlights or

front position lights are turned on. (The rear fog lights can be used

when the front fog lights are turned on.)

Turns the front and

rear fog lights off

Turns the front fog

lights on

Turns both front and

rear fog lights on

Releasing the switch ring

returns it to .

Operating the switch ring

again turns only the rear fog

lights off.

Fron Rear

191

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Windshield wipers and washer

Intermittent windshield wiper with interval adjuster

Wiper intervals can be adjusted for intermittent operation

(wipers operate at a set interval).

Off

Intermittent wind-

shield wiper opera-

tion

Low speed wind-

shield wiper opera-

tion

High speed wind-

shield wiper opera-

tion

Temporary opera-

tion

Releasing the lever returns to

Increases the intermittent

windshield wiper fre-

quency

Decreases the intermittent

windshield wiper fre-

quency

192

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Washer/wiper operation

Wipers operate automati-

cally. (After operating several

times, the wipers operate one

more time after a short delay

to prevent dripping.)

193

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Rain-sensing windshield wipers

When is selected, the wipers will operate automatically

when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically

adjusts wiper timing according to rain volume and vehicle

speed.

The wiper operation is selected as follows by turning the switch

ring. When is selected, the sensor sensitivity can be also

adjusted:

Off

Rain-sensing wind-

shield wiper opera-

tion

Low speed wind-

shield wiper opera-

tion

High speed wind-

shield wiper opera-

tion

Temporary opera-

tion

Releasing the lever returns to

194

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Sensor sensitivity (high)

Sensor sensitivity (low)

Washer/wiper operation

Wipers operate automati-

cally. (After operating several

times, the wipers operate one

more time after a short delay

to prevent dripping.)

195

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation

Vehicle speed affects the following even when the wipers are not in

“AUTO” mode.

Intermittent wiper interval

Wiper operation when the washer is being used (delay until drip preven-

tion wiper sweep occurs)

Low speed wiper operation selected, wiper operation will be switched from

low speed to intermittent wiper operation only when the vehicle is station-

ary.

(However, the mode cannot be switched when the adjustment dial for the

intermittent wiper interval is set to the lowest setting.)

Raindrop sensor (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

If the wiper switch is turned to “AUTO” position while the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode, the wiper will operate

once to show that auto mode is activated.

If the temperature of the raindrop sensor is 90C (194F) or higher, or -

30C (-22F) or lower, automatic operation may not occur. In this case,

operate the wipers in any mode other than “AUTO”.

Outside rear view mirror defogger activation linked to windshield wiper

operation

The outside rear view mirror defogger automatically turns on when you

operate the windshield wipers.

The sensor judges the amount of rain-

drops.

196

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

IS250/220d/200d_EE

If no windshield washer fluid sprays

If there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir and no

washer fluid sprays, the nozzle may be blocked. In this case, contact any

authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional, and have your Lexus inspected.

Customization that can be configured at any authorized Lexus dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional

Settings (e.g. drip prevention function) can be changed.

(Customizable features P. 556)

CAUTION

Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in “AUTO” mode (vehicles

with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or

the windshield is subject to vibration in “AUTO” mode. Take care that your

fingers or anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.

Caution regarding the use of washer fluid

When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes

warm. The fluid may freeze on the windscreen and cause low visibility. This

may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.

When a nozzle becomes blocked

Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle

Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled

toward you and held continually.

197

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Headlight cleaner switch

The headlight cleaner can be operated when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the

headlight switch is turned on.

Windshield washer linked operation

Only for the first time when the windshield washer is operated after the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode with the

headlights on, the headlight cleaners will also operate once. (P. 191)

When using the headlight cleaner

The washer fluid will spray out into the surrounding area and may get on

clothes, items etc. Therefore, check the surrounding area before using the

headlight cleaner.

NOTICE

When the washer fluid tank is empty

Do not use this function when the washer fluid tank is empty. This may

cause the washer fluid pump to overheat.

Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.

Press the switch to clean the

headlights.

: If equipped

198

IS250/220d/200d_EE

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruise control

Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the

accelerator pedal.

Indicator

Cruise control switch

Setting the vehicle speed

Press the “ON-OFF” button

to activate the cruise control.

Cruise control indicator will

come on.

Press the button again to

deactivate the cruise control.

Accelerate or decelerate the

vehicle to the desired speed,

and push the lever down to

set the speed.

The vehicle speed at the

moment the lever is released

becomes the set speed.

STEP 1

STEP 2

: If equipped

199

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Adjusting the set speed

To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set

speed is obtained.

Increases the speed

Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Momentar-

ily move the lever in the

desired direction.

Large adjustment: Hold the

lever in the desired direction.

The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment: By approximately 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time the

lever is operated.

Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased con-

tinually until the lever is released.

Canceling and resuming the constant speed control

Pulling the lever toward

you cancels the constant

speed control.

The speed setting is also can-

celed when the brakes are

applied or the clutch pedal

(manual transmission only) is

depressed.

Pushing the lever up

resumes the constant speed

control.

Resuming is available when

the vehicle speed is more

than approximately 40 km/h

200

2-4. Using other driving systems

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Cruise control can be set when

The shift lever is in the D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.

Range 4 or higher has been selected by using the paddle shift.

(vehicles with paddle shift switch)

Vehicle speed is above approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed

The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set

speed resumes.

Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased

by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the

lever down to set the new speed.

Automatic cruise control cancelation

Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the follow-

ing situations.

Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 16 km/h (10 mph)

below the preset vehicle speed.

At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.

Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

VSC is activated.

If the cruise control indicator light flashes

Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press

the button again to reactivate the system.

If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels

immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise

control system. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

201

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake

Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.

Situations unsuitable for cruise control

Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.

Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting

in death or serious injury.

In heavy traffic

On roads with sharp bends

On winding roads

On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow

On steep hills

Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.

When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing

202

2-4. Using other driving systems

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Dynamic radar cruise control

Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise control

with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or deceler-

ates in order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead.

Indicator

Display

Set speed

Distance switch

Cruise control switch

: If equipped

203

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode)

Press the “ON-OFF” button

to activate the cruise control.

Cruise control indicator will

come on.

Press the button again to

deactivate the cruise control.

Accelerate or decelerate the

vehicle to the desired speed,

and push the lever down to

set the speed.

The vehicle speed at the

moment the lever is released

becomes the set speed.

STEP 1

STEP 2

204

2-4. Using other driving systems

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Adjusting the set speed

To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set

speed is displayed.

Increases the speed

Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Momentar-

ily move the lever in the

desired direction.

Large adjustment: Hold the

lever in the desired direction.

In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will

be increased or decreased as follows:

• When the set speed is shown in “MPH”

Fine adjustment: By approximately 8 km/h (5 mph) each time the

lever is operated

Large adjustment: By approximately 8 km/h (5 mph) for each

0.75 seconds the lever is held

• When the set speed is shown in “km/h”

Fine adjustment: By approximately 5 km/h (3.1 mph) each time

the lever is operated

Large adjustment: By approximately 5 km/h (3.1 mph) for each

0.75 seconds the lever is held

In the constant speed control mode (P. 209), the set speed will be

increased or decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment: By approximately 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time the

lever is operated

Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased con-

tinually until the lever is released.

205

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

Pressing the button changes

the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance as follows:

Long

Medium

Short

The vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance is set automatically to

long mode when the

“ENGINE START STOP”

switch is turned to IGNI-

TION ON mode.

If a vehicle is running ahead

of you, the preceding vehicle

mark will also be displayed.

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings

Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances

shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accordance

with vehicle speed.

Preceding

vehicle mark

Distance options Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

Long Approximately 50 m (160 ft.)

Medium Approximately 40 m (130 ft.)

Short Approximately 30 m (100 ft.)

206

2-4. Using other driving systems

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Canceling and resuming the speed control

Pulling the lever toward

you cancels the cruise con-

trol.

The speed setting is also can-

celed when the brakes are

applied.

Pushing the lever up

resumes the cruise control

and returns vehicle speed

to the set speed.

Resuming is available when

the vehicle speed is more

than approximately 40 km/h

207

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehi-

cles up to approximately 120 m (400 ft.) ahead, determines the cur-

rent vehicle-to-vehicle following distance, and operates to

maintain a suitable following distance from the vehicle ahead.

Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on

long downhill slopes.

Example of constant speed cruising

When there are no vehicles ahead

The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-

to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle

distance control.

Example of deceleration cruising

When the vehicle ahead is driving slower than the set speed

When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automat-

ically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle

speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tone

warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent

your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.

208

2-4. Using other driving systems

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Example of follow-up cruising

When following a vehicle driving slower than the set speed

The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes

in the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-

vehicle distance set by the driver.

Example of acceleration

When there are no longer any vehicles ahead driving slower than

the set speed

The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then

returns to constant speed cruising.

Approach warning

When your vehicle is too close to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient

automatic deceleration via the cruise control is not possible, the

display will flash and the buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An

example of this would be if another driver cuts in front of you

while you are following a vehicle. Apply the brakes to ensure an

appropriate vehicle-to-vehicle distance.

Warnings may not occur when

In the following instances, there is a possibility that the warn-

ings will not occur:

When the speed of the vehicle ahead matches or exceeds your

vehicle speed

When the vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely slow

speed

Immediately after the cruise control speed was set

At the instant the accelerator is applied

209

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Selecting conventional constant speed control mode

Constant speed control mode differs from vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance control mode. When constant speed control mode is selected,

your vehicle will maintain a set speed regardless of whether or not

there are other vehicles in the lane ahead.

Press the “ON-OFF” button

to activate the cruise control.

Cruise control indicator will

come on.

Press the button again to deacti-

vate the cruise control.

Switch to constant speed

control mode.

(Push the lever forward and

hold for approximately one

second.)

When in constant speed control

mode, to return to vehicle-to-

vehicle distance control mode,

push the lever forward again

and hold for approximately 1

second.

After the desired speed has been

set, it is not possible to return to

vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-

trol mode.

If the “ENGINE START STOP”

switch is turned off and then

turned to IGNITION ON mode

again, the vehicle will automati-

cally return to vehicle-to-vehi-

cle distance control mode.

210

2-4. Using other driving systems

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Adjusting the speed setting:

P. 204

Canceling and resuming the

speed setting: P. 206

Dynamic radar cruise control can be set when

The shift lever is in the D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.

Range 4 or higher has been selected by using the paddle shift.

(vehicles with paddle shift switch)

Vehicle speed is above approximately 50 km/h (30 mph).

Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed

The vehicle can accelerate normally. After acceleration, the set speed

resumes. However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the

vehicle speed may decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the dis-

tance to the vehicle ahead.

Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the

following situations:

Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

VSC is activated.

The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way.

The windshield wipers are operating at high speed (when the wiper

switch is set to the “AUTO” mode or the high speed wiper operation

position).

When snow mode is set. (IS250 only)

If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for

any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact any

authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional.

211

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Automatic cancelation of constant speed control

The cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in the following

situations:

Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 16 km/h (10 mph)

below the set vehicle speed.

At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.

Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

VSC is activated.

Radar sensor and grille cover

Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-

vehicle distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as

snow, ice and plastic objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.)

Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected.

Warning lights, messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control

Warning lights, messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system mal-

function or to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. (P.

467, 473)

Grille cover

Radar sensor

212

2-4. Using other driving systems

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Certification

Hereby, DENSO CORPORATION declares that this DNMWR005 is in

compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions

of Directive 1999/5/EC.

Hér með lýsir DENSO CORPORATION yfir því að DNMWR005 er í

samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun

1999/5/EC.

Con la presente DENSO CORPORATION dichiara che questo

DNMWR005 è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni

pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.

Käesolevaga kinnitab DENSO CORPORATION seadme DNMWR005

vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist

tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.

Hierbij verklaart DENSO CORPORATION dat het toestel DNMWR005 in

overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante

bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.

ME ȉǾȃ ȆǹȇȅȊȈǹ DENSO CORPORATION ǻǾȁȍȃǼǿ ȅȉǿ

DNMWR005 ȈȊȂȂȅȇĭȍȃ Ǽȉǹǿ ȆȇȅȈ ȉǿȈ ȅȊȈǿȍǻǼǿȈ ǹȆǹǿȉǾȈǼǿȈ

Ȁǹǿ ȉǿȈ ȁȅǿȆǼȈ ȈȋǼȉǿȀǼȈ ǻǿǹȉǹȄǼǿȈ ȉǾȈ ȅǻǾīǿǹȈ 1999/5/ǼȀ.

Härmed intygar DENSO CORPORATION att denna DNMWR005 står I

överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta

bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.

Por medio de la presente DENSO CORPORATION declara que el

DNMWR005 cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras

disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.

DENSO CORPORATION týmto vyhlasuje, že DNMWR005 spĎĖa základné

požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.

DENSO CORPORATION izjavlja, da je ta DNMWR005 v skladu z

bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloþili direktive 1999/5/ES.

213

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

DENSO CORPORATION tímto prohlašuje, že tento DNMWR005 je ve

shodČ se základními požadavky a dalšími pĜíslušnými ustanoveními

smČrnice 1999/5/ES.

Undertegnede DENSO CORPORATION erklærer herved, at følgende

udstyrDNMWR005overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante

krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

Hiermit erklärt DENSO CORPORATION, dass sich das Gerät DNMWR005

in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den

übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.

DENSO CORPORATION erklærer herved at utstyret DNMWR005 er i

samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv

1999/5/EF.

Alulírott, DENSO CORPORATION nyilatkozom, hogy a DNMWR005

megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC

irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.

DENSO CORPORATION vakuuttaa täten että DNMWR005 tyyppinen laite

on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin

muiden ehtojen mukainen.

Par la présente DENSO CORPORATION déclare que l'appareil

DNMWR005est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres

dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.

Niniejszym DENSO CORPORATION oĞwiadcza, Īe DNMWR005 jest

zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaáymi stosownymi

postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.

DENSO CORPORATION declara que este DNMWR005está conforme

com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva 1999/5/CE.

Hawnhekk, DENSO CORPORATION, jiddikjara li dan DNMWR005

jikkonforma mal-ƫtiƥijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti oƫrajn relevanti li

hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.

Ar šo, DENSO CORPORATION, deklarƝ, ka DNMWR005 atbilst DirektƯvas

1999/5/EK bǌtiskajƗm prasƯbƗm un citiem ar to saistƯtajiem noteikumiem.

Šiuo DENSO CORPORATION deklaruoja, kad šisDNMWR005atitinka

esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.

214

2-4. Using other driving systems

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Before using dynamic radar cruise control

Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.

Be aware of the set speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not

appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your

vehicle and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes etc.

Cautions regarding the driving assist systems

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

Assisting the driver to measure following distance

The dynamic radar cruise control is only intended to help the driver in

determining the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and

a designated vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows

careless or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the

driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for driver to pay

close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.

Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance

The dynamic radar cruise control determines whether the following dis-

tance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling

ahead is appropriate or not. It is not capable of making any other type of

judgement. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain

vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of danger in

any given situation.

Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle

The dynamic radar cruise control has no capability to prevent or avoid a

collision with a vehicle traveling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any

danger, the driver must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle

and act appropriately in order to ensure the safety of all involved.

To avoid inadvertent cruise control activation

Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.

215

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control

Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.

Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an acci-

dent resulting in death or serious injury.

In heavy traffic

On roads with sharp bends

On winding roads

On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice and snow

On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up

and down gradients

At entrances to expressways

When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sen-

sors from functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)

Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.

When an approach warning buzzer is heard often

When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing

When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead

Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles

are in front of you.

As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the

approach warning (P. 208) will not be activated, and a fatal or serious

accident may result.

Vehicles that cut in suddenly

Vehicles traveling at low speeds

Vehicles that are not moving

Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)

Motorcycles traveling in the same lane

216

2-4. Using other driving systems

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not

function correctly

Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sen-

sor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and a fatal or serious

accident may result:

When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the

functioning of the sensor

When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the

trunk etc.)

When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow

When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable

When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly

Handling the radar sensor

Observe the following to ensure the cruise control system can function

effectively.

Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an

accident.

Keep the sensor and front grille cover clean at all times.

Clean the sensor and front grille cover with a soft cloth so you do not

mark or damage them.

Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.

If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunc-

tion. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always

have the area inspected and adjusted by any authorized Lexus dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

Do not disassemble the sensor.

Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or sur-

rounding area.

Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover.

Do not replace them with non-genuine parts.

217

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Lexus parking assist-sensor

The distance to obstacles measured by the sensors is communicated

via the multi-information display and a buzzer when parallel parking

or maneuvering into a garage. Always check the surrounding area

when using this system.

With navigation system

For vehicles equipped with a navigation system, refer to the separate

“Navigation System Owner’s Manual” for further details.

Without navigation system

Types of sensors

Front corner sensors

Rear corner sensors

Back sensors

Multi-information display (P. 181)

Front corner sensor opera-

tion

Rear corner sensor opera-

tion

Back sensor operation

: If equipped

218

2-4. Using other driving systems

IS250/220d/200d_EE

The distance display and buzzer

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approx-

imate distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.

Front corner sensors

Multi-information

display Approximate distance

to obstacle Buzzer

50 to 40 cm

(1.6 to 1.3 ft.) Medium

40 to 30 cm

(1.3 to 1.0 ft.) Fast

30 cm (1.0 ft.) or less Continuous

Lexus parking assist-sensor switch (P. 365)

When on, an indicator is dis-

played to inform the driver

that the function is opera-

tional.

219

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Rear corner sensors

Back sensors

Multi-information

display Approximate distance

to obstacle Buzzer

50 to 37.5 cm

(1.6 to 1.2 ft.) Medium

37.5 to 25 cm

(1.2 to 0.8 ft.) Fast

25 cm (0.8 ft.) or less Continuous

Multi-information

display Approximate distance

to obstacle Buzzer

150 to 60 cm

(4.9 to 2.0 ft.) Slow

60 to 45 cm

(2.0 to 1.5 ft.) Medium

45 to 35 cm

(1.5 to 1.1 ft.) Fast

35 cm (1.1 ft.) or less Continuous

220

2-4. Using other driving systems

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Detection range of the sensors

Approximately 50 cm (1.6

ft.)

Approximately 50 cm (1.6

ft.)

Approximately 150 cm (4.9

ft.)

The diagram shows the detec-

tion range of the sensors. Note

that the sensors cannot detect

obstacles that are extremely

close to the vehicle.

The range of the sensors may

change depending on the shape

of the object etc.

221

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

222

2-4. Using other driving systems

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Sensor detection information

Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect

the ability of the sensor to correctly detect obstacles. Particular instances

where this may occur are listed below.

• There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor.

• The sensor is frozen.

• The sensor is covered in any way.

• The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.

• On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass.

• The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle

engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing

ultrasonic waves.

• There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the

vicinity.

• The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.

• The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or wireless antenna.

• Towing eyelets are installed.

• The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.

• The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb.

• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.

In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of

their shapes, signs and other objects may be judged by the sensor to be

closer than they are.

The shape of the obstacle may prevent the sensor from detecting it. Pay

particular attention to the following obstacles.

• Wires, fences, ropes etc.

• Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb radio waves

• Sharply-angled objects

•Low obstacles

• Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction

of your vehicle

If the display flashes and a message is displayed

P. 473

Customization that can be configured at any authorized Lexus dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional

Settings (e.g. buzzer volume) can be changed. (Customizable features P.

556)

223

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Caution when using the Lexus parking assist-sensor

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely

and possibly cause an accident.

Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 10 km/h (6 mph).

Do not attach any accessories within the sensor range.

NOTICE

Notes when washing the vehicle

Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.

Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.

224

2-4. Using other driving systems

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Driving assist systems

To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following sys-

tems operate automatically in response to various driving situations.

Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should

not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly,

or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface.

Brake assist

Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal

is depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation.

VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or

turning on slippery road surfaces.

TRC (Traction Control)

Maintains drive power and prevents the rear wheels from spinning

when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.

Hill-start assist control (vehicles with an automatic transmis-

sion)

Helps to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward when starting

on an incline or slippery slope.

EPS (Electric Power Steering)

Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to

turn the steering wheel.

PCS (Pre-Crash Safety System) (if equipped)

P. 230



VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management)

Provides integrated control of the ABS, brake assist, TRC, VSC,

hill-start assist control, and EPS systems.

Helps to maintain vehicle stability when swerving on slippery road

225

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

When the VSC/TRC/hill-start assist control systems are operating

The slip indicator flashes to

indicate that the VSC/TRC/hill-

start assist control systems have

been engaged.

The stop lights and high

mounted stoplight turn on when

the hill-start assist control sys-

tem is operating.

To disable TRC/VSC

If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, TRC and VSC may

reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn

the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.

Turning off TRC

Quickly push and release the

switch to turn off TRC

A message will be shown on the

multi-information display.

Push the switch again to turn

the system back on.

226

2-4. Using other driving systems

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Turning off TRC and VSC

Push and hold the switch for

more than 3 seconds or more

while the vehicle is stopped to

turn off TRC and VSC.

A message will be shown on the

multi- information display and

the VSC off indicator light will

come on.

Push the switch again to turn

the system back on.

When the message is displayed on the multi-information display showing

that TRC has been disabled even if the VSC off switch has not been pressed

(IS250 only)

TRC and hill-start assist control cannot be operated. Contact any authorized

Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional.

Automatic reactivation of the TRC/VSC systems

If the TRC/VSC systems are turned off, re-starting the engine will automati-

cally reactivate them.

Automatic TRC reactivation

If only the TRC system is turned off, the TRC system will turn on when

vehicle speed increases.

Automatic TRC and VSC reactivation

If the TRC and VSC systems are turned off, the systems will not turn on

even when vehicle speed increases.

227

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC, TRC and hill-

start assist control systems

A sound may be heard from the engine compartment if the brake pedal is

depressed repeatedly when the engine is started or just after the vehicle

begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has

occurred in any of these systems.

Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are

operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.

• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.

• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.

• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is activated.

• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.

Hill-start assist control is operational when

The shift lever is in the D or S position.

The brake pedal is not depressed.

The vehicle rolls backward.

EPS operation sound

When the steering wheel operates, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be

heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.

Reduced effectiveness of EPS

The effectiveness of EPS is reduced to prevent the system from overheating

when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The

steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from

excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine OFF. The

system should return to normal within 10 minutes.

If the slip indicator comes on

It may indicate a malfunction in the VSC, TRC or hill start assist control

function. Contact any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional.

228

2-4. Using other driving systems

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

The ABS does not operate effectively when

The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded.

The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick

road.

Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal

conditions

The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle's stopping distance. Always

maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following sit-

uations.

When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads

When driving with tire chains

When driving over bumps in the road

When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven surfaces

TRC may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slip-

pery road surfaces, even if the TRC system is operating.

Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be

lost.

Hill- start assist control does not operate effectively when (vehicles with an

automatic transmission)

Do not overly rely on the hill-start assist control. The hill start assist control

may not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice.

When the VSC is activated

The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving

may cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. Exercise particu-

lar care when the indicator light flashes.

When TRC and VSC are off

Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions.

As these are systems to help enhance vehicle stability and driving force, do

not turn off TRC and VSC unless necessary.

229

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and

total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the

appropriate tire pressure level.

The ABS, VSC and TRC systems will not function correctly if different

tires are fitted on the vehicle.

Contact any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional, for further information when replacing tires or

wheels.

Handling of tires and suspension

Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will

affect the driving assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction.

230

2-4. Using other driving systems

IS250/220d/200d_EE

PCS (Pre-Crash Safety system)

When the radar sensor detects possibility of a frontal collision, the pre-

crash safety system such as the brakes and seat belts are automatically

engaged to lessen impact and injuries to occupants as well as vehicle

damage.

Pre-crash seat belts

If the pre-crash sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the

pre-crash safety system will retract the seat belt before the collision

occurs.

The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or

loses control of the vehicle. (P. 76)

However, the system will not operate in the event of skidding when

the VSC systems are disabled.

Pre-crash brake assist

When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system

applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake

pedal is depressed.

Pre-crash braking

When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system

warns the driver using a warning light, warning display and buzzer.

If the system determines that a collision is unavoidable, the brakes

are automatically applied to reduce the collision speed. The pre-

: If equipped

231

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Disabling the pre-crash braking

The pre-crash braking function

can be turned on and off using

the satellite switch. (P. 365)

Press “”or “” to display the

PCS brake setting ( ). Then,

press the “ON/OFF” button in

the middle of the switch to

select either “ON” or “OFF”

().

It may take approximately 3

seconds for the display to

change after the satellite switch

is operated.

The “PCS” warning light

flashes when “OFF” is selected.

Radar sensor

Detects vehicles or other obsta-

cles on or near the road ahead

and determines whether a colli-

sion is imminent based on the

position, speed, and heading of

the obstacles.

Grille cover

Radar sensor

Obstacles not detected

The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as pylons. There may also be

occasions when the radar sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicy-

cles, motorcycles, trees, or snowdrifts.

232

2-4. Using other driving systems

IS250/220d/200d_EE

The pre-crash safety system is operational when

Pre-crash seat belts (type A):

• Vehicle speed is above 5 km/h (4 mph).

• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncom-

ing vehicle exceeds 30 to 40 km/h (19 to 25 mph).

• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.

Pre-crash seat belts (type B):

• Vehicle speed exceeds 30 km/h (19 mph).

• The system detects sudden braking or skidding.

• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.

Pre-crash brake assist:

• Vehicle speed is above 30 km/h (19 mph).

• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the

vehicle running ahead of you is greater than 30 to 40 km/h (19 to 25

mph).

• The brake pedal is depressed.

Pre-crash braking:

• The pre-crash braking function is activated.

• Vehicle speed is above 15 km/h (10 mph).

• The relative speed difference between your vehicle and another vehi-

cle that is forward of your vehicle, or the speed at which your vehicle

is approaching an obstacle is greater than 15 km/h (10 mph).

Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no possibility of col-

lision

When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve

When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve

When driving over a narrow iron bridge

When there is a metal object on the road surface

When driving on an uneven road surface

When passing an oncoming vehicle on a right-turn (right-hand drive

countries) or left-turn (left-hand drive countries)

When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front

When a grade separation/interchange, sign, billboard, or other structure

appears to be directly in the vehicle’s line of travel.

233

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

When a billboard or other metallic structure appears to be in the vehi-

cle’s direct line of travel due to driving on a hill.

When an extreme change in vehicle height occurs

When the axis of the radar is out of adjustment

When passing through certain toll gates

When driving on a bridge.

When the system is activated in the situations described above there is also a

possibility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be

applied with a force greater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the

retracted position, stop the vehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and

refasten.

Situations in which the pre-crash safety system does not function properly

The system may not function effectively in situations such as the following:

On roads with sharp bends or uneven surfaces

If a vehicle suddenly moves in front of your vehicle, such as at an inter-

section

If a vehicle suddenly cuts in front of your vehicle, such as when overtak-

ing

In inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or sand storms

When your vehicle is skidding with the VSC system off

When an extreme change in vehicle height occurs

When the axis of the radar is out of adjustment

Automatic cancelation of the pre-crash safety system

When a malfunction occurs due to sensor contamination, etc. that results in

the sensors being unable to detect obstacles, the pre-crash safety system will

be automatically disabled. In this case, the system will not activate even if

there is a collision possibility.

234

2-4. Using other driving systems

IS250/220d/200d_EE

235

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

When there is a malfunction in the system

Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (P. 467,

473)

Certification

Hereby, DENSO CORPORATION declares that this DNMWR005 is in

compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions

of Directive 1999/5/EC.

Hér með lýsir DENSO CORPORATION yfir því að DNMWR005 er í

samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun

1999/5/EC.

Con la presente DENSO CORPORATION dichiara che questo

DNMWR005 è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni

pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.

Käesolevaga kinnitab DENSO CORPORATION seadme DNMWR005

vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist

tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.

Hierbij verklaart DENSO CORPORATION dat het toestel DNMWR005 in

overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante

bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.

ME ȉǾȃ ȆǹȇȅȊȈǹ DENSO CORPORATION ǻǾȁȍȃǼǿ ȅȉǿ

DNMWR005 ȈȊȂȂȅȇĭȍȃ Ǽȉǹǿ ȆȇȅȈ ȉǿȈ ȅȊȈǿȍǻǼǿȈ ǹȆǹǿȉǾȈǼǿȈ

Ȁǹǿ ȉǿȈ ȁȅǿȆǼȈ ȈȋǼȉǿȀǼȈ ǻǿǹȉǹȄǼǿȈ ȉǾȈ ȅǻǾīǿǹȈ 1999/5/ǼȀ.

Härmed intygar DENSO CORPORATION att denna DNMWR005 står I

överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta

bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.

Por medio de la presente DENSO CORPORATION declara que el

DNMWR005 cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras

disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.

DENSO CORPORATION týmto vyhlasuje, že DNMWR005 spĎĖa základné

požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.

DENSO CORPORATION izjavlja, da je ta DNMWR005 v skladu z

bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloþili direktive 1999/5/ES.

236

2-4. Using other driving systems

IS250/220d/200d_EE

DENSO CORPORATION tímto prohlašuje, že tento DNMWR005 je ve

shodČ se základními požadavky a dalšími pĜíslušnými ustanoveními

smČrnice 1999/5/ES.

Undertegnede DENSO CORPORATION erklærer herved, at følgende

udstyrDNMWR005overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante

krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

Hiermit erklärt DENSO CORPORATION, dass sich das Gerät DNMWR005

in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den

übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.

DENSO CORPORATION erklærer herved at utstyret DNMWR005 er i

samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv

1999/5/EF.

Alulírott, DENSO CORPORATION nyilatkozom, hogy a DNMWR005

megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC

irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.

DENSO CORPORATION vakuuttaa täten että DNMWR005 tyyppinen laite

on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin

muiden ehtojen mukainen.

Par la présente DENSO CORPORATION déclare que l'appareil

DNMWR005est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres

dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.

Niniejszym DENSO CORPORATION oĞwiadcza, Īe DNMWR005 jest

zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaáymi stosownymi

postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.

DENSO CORPORATION declara que este DNMWR005está conforme

com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva 1999/5/CE.

Hawnhekk, DENSO CORPORATION, jiddikjara li dan DNMWR005

jikkonforma mal-ƫtiƥijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti oƫrajn relevanti li

hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.

Ar šo, DENSO CORPORATION, deklarƝ, ka DNMWR005 atbilst DirektƯvas

1999/5/EK bǌtiskajƗm prasƯbƗm un citiem ar to saistƯtajiem noteikumiem.

Šiuo DENSO CORPORATION deklaruoja, kad šisDNMWR005atitinka

esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.

237

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Limitations of the pre-crash safety system

Do not rely on the pre-crash safety system. Always drive safely, taking care

to observe your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other road

hazards.

Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

Cautions regarding the assist contents of the system

By means of alarms and brake control, the pre-crash safety system is

intended to assist the driver in avoiding collisions through the process of

LOOK-JUDGE-ACT. There are limits to the degree of assistance the system

can provide, so please keep in mind the following important points.

Assisting the driver in watching the road

The pre-crash safety system is only able to detect obstacles directly in

front of the vehicle, and only within a limited range. It is not a mechanism

that allows careless or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can

assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for the

driver to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.

Assisting the driver in making correct judgment

When attempting to estimate the possibility of a collision, the only data

available to the pre-crash safety system is that from obstacles it has

detected directly in front of the vehicle. Therefore, it is absolutely neces-

sary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not there

is a possibility of collision in any given situation.

Assisting the driver in taking action

The pre-crash safety system’s braking assist feature is designed to help

reduce the severity of a collision, and so only acts when the system has

judged that a collision is unavoidable. This system by itself is not capable

of automatically avoiding a collision or bringing the vehicle to a stop

safely. For this reason, when encountering a dangerous situation the driver

must take direct and immediate action in order to ensure the safety of all

involved.

238

2-4. Using other driving systems

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Handling the radar sensor

Observe the following to ensure the pre-crash safety system can function

effectively.

Keep the sensor and front grille clean at all times.

Clean the sensor and front grille with a soft cloth so you do not mark or

damage them.

Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.

If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may become

inaccurate or malfunction. If the sensor or surrounding area are subject to

a strong impact, always have the area inspected and adjusted by any

authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

Do not disassemble the sensor.

Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille guard or sur-

rounding area.

237

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

2-5. Driving information

Cargo and luggage

CAUTION

Things that must not be carried in the trunk

The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk.

Receptacles containing gasoline

Aerosol cans

Storage precautions

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the item

may get under the clutch, brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the ped-

als from being depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or hit the

driver or passengers, causing an accident.

• Driver’s feet

• Front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)

• Package tray

• Instrument panel

• Dashboard

Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure

someone during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Take notice of the following information about storage precautions,

cargo capacity and load.

Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.

Be sure all items are secured in place.

Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far

forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.

For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.

238

2-5. Driving information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Luggage capacity and distribution

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so will not only put load on

the tires, but also reduce steering and braking performance. This could lead

to an accident resulting in serious injury or even death.

Do not overload the vehicle.

Do not apply load to the vehicle unevenly.

239

2-5. Driving information

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Winter driving tips

Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving

the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate

to the prevailing weather conditions.

Pre-winter preparations

Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside

temperatures.

• Engine oil

• Engine coolant

• Washer fluid

Have a service technician inspect the level and specific

gravity of battery electrolyte.

Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a

set of tire chains for the rear tires.

Ensure that all tires are the specified size and the same brand, and

that chains match the size of the tires.

Before driving the vehicle

Perform the following according to the driving conditions.

Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that

is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the

ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from

freezing.

To ensure proper operation of the climate control system

fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet

vents in front of the windshield.

Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chas-

sis.

240

2-5. Driving information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Selecting tire chains

Tire chains can be mounted on 16- and 17-inch tires. They cannot

be mounted on 18-inch tires. Use the correct tire chain size when

mounting the tire chains.

Chain size is regulated for each tire size.

Side chain

(3 mm [0.12 in.] in diameter)

Cross chain

(4 mm [0.16 in.] in diameter)

Regulations on the use of tire chains

Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to

location and type of road. Always check local regulations before

installing chains.

Install the chains on the rear tires.

When driving the vehicle

Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed

suitable to road conditions.

When parking the vehicle

Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P (automatic

transmission) or 1 or R (manual transmission) without setting

the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, prevent-

ing it from being released. If necessary, block the wheels to

prevent inadvertent sliding or creeping.

241

2-5. Driving information

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Retighten the chains after driving 0.5  1.0 km (1/4  1/2

mile).

Tire chains (models with 16- and 17-inch tires)

Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains.

Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.

Install tire chains on the rear tires. Do not install tire chains on front tires.

Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompany-

ing manual.

CAUTION

Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or

serious injury.

Use tires of the specified size.

Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.

Do not drive at speeds in excess of the speed limit or the speed limit spec-

ified for the snow tires being used.

Driving with tire chains (models with 16- and 17-inch tires)

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely,

and may cause death or serious injury.

Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being

used or 50 km/h (30 mph), whichever is lower.

Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.

Avoid sudden turns and braking.

Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle con-

trol is maintained.

242

2-5. Driving information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Trailer towing

The strain of towing a trailer will have a negative impact on the run-

ning performance, handling, fuel consumption and endurance of your

vehicle. Use the vehicle features in the correct manner and operate the

vehicle with care for safer driving and optimal comfort. Damage and/

or malfunctions that occur as a result of towing performed for com-

mercial purposes are not covered by the Lexus warranty.

Ask your local authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional, for further details before towing,

as there are additional legal requirements in some countries.

Weight limits

Check the allowable towing capacity, GVM (Gross Vehicle

Mass), MPAC (Maximum Permissible Axle Capacity), and

permissible draw bar load before towing. (P. 534)

Towing hitch/bracket

Lexus recommends the use of the Lexus hitch/bracket for

your vehicle. Other products of a suitable nature and compa-

rable quality may also be used.

To prevent an accident

The handling of the vehicle will feel different when towing a

trailer. Beware of the 3 most common causes of towing-

related accidents: driver error, excessive speed, and overload-

243

2-5. Driving information

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Important points regarding trailer loads

Total trailer weight and permissible drawbar load

Total trailer weight

Weight of the trailer itself plus

the trailer load should be within

the maximum towing capacity.

Exceeding this weight is dan-

gerous. (P. 534)

Permissible drawbar load

Allocate the trailer load so that

the drawbar load is greater than

25 kg (55.1 lb.) or 4% of the

towing capacity. Do not let the

drawbar load exceed the indi-

cated weight. (P. 534)

244

2-5. Driving information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Information tag (manufacturer’s label)

Gross vehicle mass

The combined weight of the

driver, passengers, towing hitch,

total curb mass and drawbar

load should not exceed the

gross vehicle mass by more

than 100 kg (220.5 lb.). Exceed-

ing this weight is dangerous.

Maximum permissible rear

axle capacity

The weight borne by the rear

axle should not exceed the max-

imum permissible axle capacity

by 15% or more. Exceeding this

weight is dangerous.

The values for towing capacity

were derived from testing con-

ducted at sea level. Take note

that engine output and towing

capacity will be reduced at high

altitudes.

CAUTION

When the gross vehicle mass limit or maximum permissible axle capacity is

exceeded

Do not exceed the established speed limit for towing a trailer in built-up

areas or 100 km/h (62 mph), whichever is the lower.

245

2-5. Driving information

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Installation positions for the towing hitch/bracket and hitch ball

457 mm (18.0 in.)

477 mm (18.8 in.)

504 mm (19.8 in.)

457 mm (18.0 in.)

477 mm (18.8 in.)

504 mm (19.8 in.)

246

2-5. Driving information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

1110 mm (43.7 in.)

681 mm (26.8 in.)

360 mm (14.2 in.)

IS250:

Vehicles with

badges* 377 mm (14.8 in.)

Vehicles without

badges* 367 mm (14.4 in.)

Vehicles sold in Turkey,

Ukraine, Kazakhstan and

Belarus. 379 mm (14.9 in.)

IS220d and IS200d:

379 mm (14.9 in.)

10 mm (0.4 in.)

8 mm (0.3 in.)

*: Except Turkey, Ukraine,

Kazakhstan and Belarus

Tire information

Increase the tire inflation pressure to 20.0 kPa (0.2 kgf/cm2 or bar, 3 psi)

greater than the recommended value when towing. (P. 548)

Increase the air pressure of the trailer tires in accordance with the total

trailer weight and according to the values recommended by the manufac-

turer of your trailer.

Trailer lights

Check that the turn signal lights and stoplights are operating correctly every

time you hitch up the trailer. Directly wiring up to your vehicle may damage

the electrical system and stop the lights from functioning correctly.

247

2-5. Driving information

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Break-in schedule

Lexus recommends that vehicles fitted with new power train components

should not be used for towing trailers for the first 800 km (500 miles).

Maintenance

Maintenance must be performed more frequently when using the vehicle

for towing due to the greater weight burden placed on the vehicle com-

pared to normal driving.

Retighten all bolts securing the hitching ball and bracket after towing for

approximately 1000 km (600 miles).

Safety checks before towing

Check that the maximum load limit for the towing hitch/bracket hitch

ball is not exceeded. Bear in mind that the coupling weight of the trailer

will add to the load exerted on the vehicle. Also make sure that you will

not be towing a load that exceeds the maximum permissible axle capac-

ity.

Ensure that the trailer load is secure.

Supplementary outside rear view mirrors should be added to the vehicle

if the traffic behind cannot be clearly seen with standard mirrors. Adjust

the extending arms of these mirrors on both sides of the vehicle so that

they always provide maximum visibility of the road behind.

NOTICE

When the rear bumper strengthening material is aluminum

Ensure the steel bracket part does not come directly in contact with that

area.

When steel and aluminum come into contact, there is a reaction similar to

corrosion, which will weaken the section concerned which may result in

damage. Apply a rust inhibitor to parts that will come in contact when

attaching a steel bracket.

When installing a towing harness to the vehicle

To prevent inoperative stop lights and damage to the vehicle stop light wir-

ing, take care when connecting a trailer harness to the vehicle. A relay with

a separate power source must be added to limit the current draw on the vehi-

cle stop light wiring.

248

2-5. Driving information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Guidance

Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. In order

to avoid accident, death or serious injury, keep the following in

mind when towing:

Checking connections between trailer and lights

Stop the vehicle and check the operation of the connection

between the trailer and lights after driving for a brief period as

well as before setting off.

Practicing driving with a coupled trailer

Get the feel for turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer

coupled by practicing in an area with no or light traffic.

When reversing with a coupled trailer, hold the section of the

steering wheel nearest to you and rotate clockwise to turn the

trailer left or counterclockwise to turn right. Always rotate

gradually to prevent steering error. Have someone guide you

when reversing to lessen the risk of accident.

Increasing vehicle-to-vehicle distance

At a speed of 10 km/h (6 mph), the distance to the vehicle run-

ning ahead of you should be equivalent to or greater than the

combined length of your vehicle and trailer. Avoid sudden brak-

ing that may cause skidding. Otherwise, the vehicle may spin

out of control. This is especially true when driving on wet or

slippery road surfaces.

Sudden acceleration/steering input/cornering

Executing sharp turns when towing may result in the trailer col-

liding with your vehicle. Decelerate well in advance when

approaching turns and take them slowly and carefully to avoid

sudden braking.

249

2-5. Driving information

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Important points regarding turning

The wheels of the trailer will travel closer to the inside of the

curve than the wheels of the vehicle. To make allowance for this,

take the turns wider than you would normally.

Important points regarding stability

Vehicle movement resulting from uneven road surfaces and

strong crosswinds will affect handling. The vehicle may also be

rocked by passing buses or large trucks. Frequently check

behind when moving alongside such vehicles. As soon as such

vehicle movement occurs, immediately start to decelerate

smoothly by slowly applying the brakes. Always steer the vehi-

cle straight ahead while braking.

Passing other vehicles

Consider the total combined length of your vehicle and trailer

and ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is sufficient

before executing lane changes.

Transmission information

Refrain from driving in 6 (manual transmission) or 4 range in S

mode (automatic transmission) to maintain the effectiveness of

the engine brake and the charge performance of electrical com-

ponents.

If the engine overheats...

Towing a loaded trailer up a long steep incline in temperatures

exceeding 30C (85F) may result in the engine overheating. If

the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is

overheating, turn the air conditioning off immediately, leave the

road and stop the vehicle in a safe place. (P. 525)

When parking the vehicle

Always place wheel chocks under the wheels of both the vehicle

and trailer. Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever

to P for automatic transmissions, and 1 or R for manual trans-

missions.

250

2-5. Driving information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Vehicle speed in towing

Observe the legal maximum speeds for trailer towing.

Before descending hills or long declines

Reduce speed and downshift. However, never downshift suddenly while

descending steep or long downhill grades.

Operation of the brake

Do not hold the brake pedal depressed often or for long periods.

Doing so may result in the brake overheating or reduce braking effects.

To avoid accident or injury

Do not use cruise control when you are towing.

Do not tow the vehicle with the compact spare tire installed.

251

2-5. Driving information

When driving

IS250/220d/200d_EE

252

3-1. Using the air conditioning sys-

tem and defogger

Automatic air

conditioning system....... 254

Power heater .................... 262

Rear window and outside

rear view mirror

defoggers ....................... 264

Windshield wiper de-icer. 265

3-2. Using the audio system

Audio system types.......... 266

Using the radio................. 269

Using the CD player ........ 273

Playing back MP3 and

WMA discs.................... 280

Operating an iPod............ 287

Operating a USB

memory.......................... 294

Optimal use of the audio

system............................ 302

Using the AUX port......... 304

Using the steering

wheel audio switches..... 305

Interior features

253

3-3. Using the Bluetooth®

audio system

Bluetooth® audio system . 308

Using the Bluetooth®

audio system .................. 313

Operating a Bluetooth®

enabled portable player.. 316

Setting up a Bluetooth®

enabled portable

player ............................. 319

Bluetooth® audio system

setup............................... 322

3-4. Using the hands-free

phone system

(for mobile phones)

Hands-free system for

mobile phones................ 323

Using the hands-free

system

(for mobile phones)........ 330

Making a phone call......... 336

Setting a mobile phone .... 340

Security and system

setup............................... 343

Using the phone book ...... 347

3-5. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list ............. 351

• Interior lights ................. 353

• Personal lights ............... 354

3-6. Using the storage features

List of storage features .... 355

• Glove box ...................... 356

• Console boxes................ 356

• Overhead console .......... 358

• Cup holders.................... 359

• Bottle holders/door

pockets........................... 360

• Auxiliary box................. 361

3-7. Other interior features

Sun visors ........................ 362

Vanity mirrors.................. 363

Clock................................ 364

Satellite switches ............. 365

Ashtrays........................... 368

Cigarette lighter............... 369

Power outlet..................... 370

Seat heaters...................... 371

Seat heaters and

ventilators ...................... 374

Armrest............................ 377

Rear sunshade.................. 378

Trunk storage extension... 380

Coat hooks....................... 381

Floor mat.......................... 382

Trunk features.................. 383

254

IS250/220d/200d_EE

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Automatic air conditioning system

Using the automatic mode

Press .

The air conditioning system begins to operate. Air outlets and fan

speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature

setting.

Press to switch to automatic mode. (IS250 only)

Automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air

modes.

Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the

temperature setting.

With navigation system

Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to

the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.

Without navigation system

Automatic mode

Driver’s side

temperature setting dis-

Changes the air outlets

Off

Fan speed Airflow dis-

Fan speed dis-

Passenger’s side

temperature setting dis-

Pollen removal

Driver's side

temperature control

Air conditioning

on/off Outside air or

recirculated mode

Windshield

defogger

Passenger's

side

tempera-

ture control

Dual operation

STEP 1

STEP 2

255

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Press “” on to increase the temperature and “” to

decrease the temperature.

The temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be set sep-

arately.

Adjusting the settings

Adjusting the temperature setting

Press “” on to increase the temperature and “” to

decrease the temperature.

The air conditioning system switches between individual and simul-

taneous modes each time is pressed.

Dual mode (the indicator on is on.): The temperature

for the left-hand seat and right-hand seat can be adjusted sepa-

rately. Operating the passenger's side temperature control will

enter dual mode.

Simultaneous mode (the indicator on is off.): Only

(driver’s side) can be used to adjust the temperature for all

seats.

Adjusting the fan speed

Press “” (increase) or “” (decrease) on .

Press to turn the fan off.

STEP 3

256

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Changing the air outlets

Press .

The air outlets switch each time is pressed. The air flow

shown on the display indicates the following.

Upper body

Upper body and feet

Feet

257

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Feet and windshield

Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

IS250

Press .

The mode switches among (recycles air inside the vehicle),

“AUTO” and (introduces air from outside the vehicle)

modes each time is pressed.

When the system is switched to automatic mode, the air condition-

ing system operates automatically.

IS220d and IS200d

Press .

The mode switches between (recycles air inside the vehicle)

and (introduces air from outside the vehicle) modes each

time is pressed.

Defogging the windshield

Press .

The air conditioning system

operates automatically.

Recirculated air mode may

automatically switch to

(outside air) mode when the

ambient temperature is low.

258

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Pollen removal mode

Press .

Outside air mode switches to

(recirculated air) mode.

Pollen is removed from the air

and the air flows to the upper

part of the body.

Usually the system will turn off

automatically after approxi-

mately 1 to 3 minutes.

To stop the operation, press

again.

Adjusting the sensitivity of the air intake control in automatic mode (IS250

only)

Press for 2 or more sec-

onds.

STEP 1

259

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Press “” (increase) or “”

(decrease) on .

From –3 (low) to 3 (high) can

be set.

Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets

Front outlets (center)

Direct air flow to the left or

right, up or down

Turn the knob to open or

close the vent

Front outlets (right and left side)

Direct air flow to the left or

right, up or down

Turn the knob to open or

close the vent

STEP 2

260

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Rear outlets

Direct air flow to the left or

right, up or down

Turn the knob fully to the

outside of the vehicle to close

the vent

261

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Using the automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature set-

ting and ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur.

Immediately after is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until

warm or cool air is ready to flow.

Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is

on.

Using the system in recirculated air mode

The windows will fog up more easily if recirculated air mode is used for an

extended period.

Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Recirculated air mode or outside air mode may be automatically switched in

accordance with the temperature setting and the inside temperature.

Window defogger feature

Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to (outside air) mode

in situations where the windows need to be defogged.

When the outside air temperature approaches 0C (32F)

The air conditioning system may not operate even when is pressed.

When the indicator light on flashes

Press and turn off the air conditioning system before turning it on

once more. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the

indicator light continues to flash. Turn the air conditioning system off and

have it inspected by any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional.

262

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Automatic mode for air intake control (IS250 only)

In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and

automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.

Pollen removal mode

In order to prevent the windshield from fogging up when the outside air

is cold, the following may occur.

• Outside air mode does not switch to .

• The air conditioning system operates automatically.

• The operation cancels after 1 minute.

In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press .

Air conditioning odors

During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter

into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause

odor to be emitted from the vents.

To reduce potential odors from occurring:

• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air

mode prior to turning the vehicle off.

• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of

time immediately after the air conditioning system is started in auto-

matic mode.

CAUTION

To prevent the windshield from fogging up

Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather.

The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the

windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking

your vision.

NOTICE

To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the

engine is stopped.

263

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Power heater

Power heater can be operated when

The engine is running.

Normal characteristics of power heater operation

The following cases do not indicate a malfunction.

When the power heater is turned on or off, some white smoke and a

slight odor may be emitted from the power heater exhaust that is located

under the floor.

When the power heater is being used under extremely cold conditions,

vapor may be visible from its exhaust.

When the power heater is turned off, you may hear a sound in the engine

compartment for about 2 minutes until the power heater turns off com-

pletely.

After the heater is off

We recommend not restarting the heater for 10 minutes after you turn it off.

Otherwise, a noise may be heard as the heater ignites.

When refueling your vehicle

The heater must be off.

This feature is used to keep the cab warm in cold conditions.

On/off

The power heater turns on

about 30 seconds after the

button is pressed, and takes

about another 55 seconds to

warm up completely.

: If equipped

264

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

To prevent burns or damage on your vehicle

NOTICE

To prevent damage to your vehicle

Do not turn the heater on and off repeatedly in 5 minute intervals as this

can shorten the life of the heater components. If the engine must be turned

on and off repeatedly within short intervals (such as when the vehicle is

being used for delivery purposes), turn the heater off.

Do not modify or open the heater without consulting any authorized

Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional. This may cause a heater malfunction or even a fire.

Be careful not to splash water or spill liquid directly on the heater or on

the heater fuel pump. This may cause the heater to malfunction.

Keep the intake and exhaust pipes of the heater free from water, snow, ice,

mud, etc. If the pipes become clogged, this can cause the heater to mal-

function.

If you notice anything unusual, such as a fluid leak, smoke or poor opera-

tion, turn off the heater and have your vehicle checked by any authorized

Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional.

Do not touch the heater or its exhaust

pipe as they are hot. You may burn

yourself.

Keep flammable items such as fuel

away from the heater and its exhaust

pipe, as this may cause a fire.

265

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers

The defogger can be operated when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

CAUTION

When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on

Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirror, as it can become

very hot and burn you.

These features are used to defog the rear window, and to remove rain-

drops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.

With navigation system

Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to

the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.

Without navigation system

On/off

The defoggers will automati-

cally turn off after approxi-

mately 15 to 60 minutes.

266

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Windshield wiper de-icer

The windshield wiper de-icer can be operated when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

CAUTION

When the windshield wiper de-icer is on

The surface of the glass at the lower part and sides of the windshield

become very hot. To prevent burning yourself, do not touch these areas.

: If equipped

This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield

and wiper blades.

On/off

The windshield wiper de-icer

will automatically turn off

after approximately 15 min-

utes.

266

IS250/220d/200d_EE

3-2. Using the audio system

Audio system types

With navigation system

Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should

refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.

Without navigation system

CD player with changer and AM/FM radio

The illustration below is for left-hand drive vehicles.

The button positions and shapes may differ slightly for right-

hand drive vehicles.

267

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Using cellular phones

Interference may be heard through the audio system's speakers if a cellular

phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is

operating.

Title Page

Using the radio P. 269

Using the CD player P. 273

Playing back MP3 and WMA discs P. 280

Operating an iPod P. 288

Operating a USB memory P. 296

Optimal use of the audio system P. 304

Using the AUX port P. 306

Using the steering wheel audio switches P. 307

268

3-2. Using the audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Certification for the radio (for Italy)

IL PRODUTTORE PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome,

Meguro-Ku, Tokyo, Japan DI QUESTO APPARECCHIO MODELLO

86120-53B00 (radio-CD player) DICHIARA CHE ESSO E’ CONFORME

AL D.M.28.08.1995 No.548, OTTEMPERANDO ALLE PRESCRIZIONI

DI CUI AL D.M.25.6.1985 (PARAGRAFO 3,ALL.A) ED AL

D.M.27.8.1987 (PARAGRAFO 3,ALL.I).

Certification for the disc player with a changer

This product is a class 1 laser product.

A laser beam leak may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Do not open the cover of the player or attempt to repair the unit yourself.

Refer servicing to qualified personnel.

Laser power: No hazardous

NOTICE

To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine off.

To avoid damaging the audio system

Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.

269

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Using the radio

The illustration below is for left-hand drive vehicles.

The button positions and shapes may differ slightly for right-hand

drive vehicles.

Vol-

Automatic

presetting of

radio stations Station selector AF mode but-

Power

TA mode button

Seeking the

frequency Station selector

Adjusting

the

AM/FM

mode

Changing the

program types

270

3-2. Using the audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Setting station presets

Manually

Search for desired stations by turning or pressing

“” or “” on .

Press and hold the button (from to ) the station

is to be set to until you hear a beep.

Automatically

Press and hold until you hear a beep.

Up to 6 stations are set in order of reception quality. When

the settings are finished, 2 beeps will be heard.

In FM1 or FM2 mode, the stations automatically set by the

audio system will be set in the FM3 presets.

RDS (Radio Data System)

This feature allows your radio to receive station and program

information (classical, news, etc.) from radio stations that broad-

cast this information.

Listening to stations of the same network

Press .

“AF-ON”, “REG-OFF” modes:The station among those of the

same network with strong reception

is selected.

“AF-ON”, “REG-ON” modes:The station among those of the

same network with strong reception

and broadcasting the same program

is selected.

Each time is pressed, the mode changes in the order of “AF-

ON”, “REG-OFF”“AF-ON”, “REG-ON”“AF-OFF”, “REG-

OFF”.

STEP 1

STEP 2

271

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Specifying program type

Press .

Each time is pressed, the program type changes in the order of

“NEWS”“SPORTS”“TALK”“POP”“CLASSICS”.

Traffic information

Press .

TP mode: The system automatically switches to traffic informa-

tion when a broadcast with a traffic information signal

is received.

The station returns to the previous one when the traffic

information ends.

TA mode: Traffic information can be heard only when a signal is

received. The system switches to the mute mode when

a signal is not received. In the CD or MP3/WMA

mode, the system automatically switches to traffic

information when a signal is received.

The audio system returns to mute, CD or MP3/WMA

mode when the traffic information ends.

The audio system mode changes as follows each time is

pressed.

FM modes: “TP”“TA”off

Modes other than the radio modes: “TA”off

Emergency broadcast reception mode

“ALARM” appears in the display in the event that an emergency

broadcast is received, and the emergency broadcast is aired.

272

3-2. Using the audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

EON (Enhanced Other Network) system (for traffic announcement func-

tion)

If the RDS station (with EON data) you are listening to is not broadcasting a

traffic information program and the audio system is in the TA (traffic

announcement) mode, the radio will be switched automatically to a station

broadcasting a traffic information program in the EON AF list when traffic

information begins.

When the battery is disconnected

Station presets are erased.

Reception sensitivity

Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the

continually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal

strength and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.

When is used, automatic station selection and automatic register-

ing of stations may not be possible.

The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear

radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic

objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.

Digital Audio Broadcast (DAB) radio

The optional radio antenna and tuner are necessary for the use of Digital

Audio Broadcast (DAB) radio.

273

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Using the CD player

The illustration below is for left-hand drive vehicles.

The button positions and shapes may differ slightly for right-hand

drive vehicles.

Powe Vol-

Track

selection CD eject Playback

CD load

CD selection

Random play-

Repeat Playback/

Displays text mes-

274

3-2. Using the audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Loading CDs

Loading a CD

Press .

“WAIT” is shown on the display.

Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber

to green.

The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”.

Loading multiple CDs

Press and hold until you hear a beep.

“WAIT” is shown on the display.

Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber

to green.

The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”.

The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is inserted.

Insert the next CD when the indicator on the slot turns from

amber to green again.

Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs.

To stop the operation, press .

Ejecting CDs

Ejecting a CD

To select the CD to be ejected,

press “” or “” on .

The number of the CD selected

is shown on the display.

Press and remove the CD.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

275

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Ejecting all the CDs

Press and hold until you hear a beep, and then remove the

CDs.

Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing tracks

Selecting a track

Press “” to move up and “” to move down using until

the desired track number is displayed.

To fast forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on until

you hear a beep.

Selecting a CD

To select a CD to play

To select the desired CD, press “” or “” on .

Random playback

Current CD

Press (RAND).

All CDs

Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep.

276

3-2. Using the audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Repeat play

To repeat a track

Press (RPT).

To repeat all of the tracks on a CD

Press and hold (RPT) until you hear a beep.

Playing and pausing tracks

To play or pause a track, press ( ).

Switching the display

Press .

Each time is pressed, the display changes in the order of Track

no./Elapsed timeCD titleTrack title.

Display

Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.

If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding until you

hear a beep will display the remaining characters.

A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.

If is pressed until you hear a beep again or has not been pressed for 6

seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.

Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed

properly or may not be displayed at all.

Canceling random and repeat playback

Press (RAND) or (RPT) again.

277

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

When “LOAD”, “ERROR” or “WAIT” is shown on the display

“LOAD”:This indicates that the CD player has completed loading the CD.

“ERROR”:This indicates a trouble either in the CD or inside the player. The

CD may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down.

“WAIT”: Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player.

Wait for a while and then press . Contact any authorized

Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional, if the CD still cannot be played back.

Discs that can be used

Discs with the marks shown below can be used.

Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc fea-

tures, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

CDs with copy-protection features may not play correctly.

CD player protection feature

To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when

a problem is detected.

If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended

periods

CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.

Lens cleaners

Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.

278

3-2. Using the audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

NOTICE

CDs and adapters that cannot be used

Do not use the following types of CDs, 8 cm (3 in.) CD adapters or Dual

Disc.

Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.

CDs that have a diameter that is not 12

cm (4.7 in.).

Low-quality and deformed CDs.

CDs with a transparent or translucent

recording area.

CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-

R labels attached to them, or that have

had the label peeled off.

279

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

NOTICE

CD player precautions

Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the

CDs or the player itself.

Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.

Do not apply oil to the CD player.

Store CDs away from direct sunlight.

Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.

Do not insert more than one CD at a

time.

280

3-2. Using the audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Playing back MP3 and WMA discs

Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs

P. 274

Selecting MP3 and WMA discs

P. 275

Selecting a folder

Selecting folders one at a time

Press () or () to select the desired folder.

Returning to the first folder

Press and hold () until you hear a beep.

The illustration below is for left-hand drive vehicles.

The button positions and shapes may differ slightly for right-hand

drive vehicles.

Powe Vol-

CD eject Playback

CD load

CD selection

File selection

Random play-

Repeat Displays

text

Folder selection

File selection

Playback/Pause

281

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Fast-forwarding and reversing files

To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on

until you hear a beep.

Selecting files

Selecting one file at a time

Turn or press “” or “” on to select the desired file.

Repeat play

Repeating a file

Press (RPT).

Repeating all of the files in a folder

Press and hold (RPT) until you hear a beep.

Random playback

To play files from a particular folder in random order

Press (RAND).

To play all of the files on a disc in random order

Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep.

Playing and pausing files

To play or pause a file, press ( ).

282

3-2. Using the audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Switching the display

Press .

Each time is pressed, the display changes in the order of

Folder no./File no./Elapsed timeFolder nameFile nameAlbum

title (MP3 only)Track titleArtist name.

Display

Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.

If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding until you

hear a beep will display the remaining characters.

A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.

If is pressed until you hear a beep again or has not been pressed for 6

seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.

Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed

properly or may not be displayed at all.

Canceling random and repeat playback

Press (RAND) or (RPT) again.

When “LOAD”, “ERROR”, “WAIT” or “NO MUSIC” is shown on the dis-

play

“LOAD”:This indicates that the CD player has completed loading the CD.

“ERROR”:This indicates a trouble either in the CD or inside the player. The

CD may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down.

“WAIT”: Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player.

Wait for a while and then press . Contact any authorized

Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional, if the CD still cannot be played back.

“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that the MP3/WMA file is not included in the

CD.

283

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Discs that can be used

Discs with the marks shown below can be used.

Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc fea-

tures, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

CD player protection feature

To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when

a problem is detected while the CD player is being used.

 If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended

periods

CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.

Lens cleaners

Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.

284

3-2. Using the audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

285

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

MP3 and WMA files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by

using MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.

This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3

format.

There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/for-

mats recorded by them that can be used.

MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards

MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)

• Compatible sampling frequencies

MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates

MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320

(kbps)

MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)

* Compatible with VBR

• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and mon-

aural

WMA file compatibility

• Compatible standards

WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9

• Compatible sampling frequencies

32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates

Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)

Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)

* Only compatible with 2-channel playback

Compatible media

Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-

RWs.

Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status

of the CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may

jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.

286

3-2. Using the audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Compatible disc formats

The following disc formats can be used.

• Disc formats:CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2

CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2

• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)

MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed

above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names

may not be displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels

• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters

• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)

• Maximum number of files per disc: 255

File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those

with the extension .mp3 or .wma.

Multi-sessions

As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to

play discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first ses-

sion can be played.

ID3 and WMA tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track

title, artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3

tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the

track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

287

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

MP3 and WMA playback

When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc

are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA

file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend

you do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any

unnecessary folders.

Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data

cannot be played.

Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and

WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and

WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage

to the speakers.

Playback

• To play MP3 file with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit

rate of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.

• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances,

depending on the characteristics of the disc.

• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for

MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the

encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of

playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at

all.

• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it

may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback

may not be possible at all.

• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks

of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.

NOTICE

CDs and adapters that cannot be used

P. 278

CD player precautions

P. 279

288

3-2. Using the audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Operating an iPod

Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle

speakers.

Connecting an iPod

Open the cover and connect

the portable audio device.

Turn on the power of the

iPod if it is not turned on.

Push .

STEP 1

STEP 2

289

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Selecting a play mode

Press to select iPod menu mode.

Pressing or changes the play mode in the fol-

lowing order:

“PLAYLISTS”“ART-

ISTS”“ALBUMS”“SONGS”

“PODCASTS”“GENRES”“COMPOSERS”

“AUDIOBOOKS”

Press to select the desired play mode.

Control panel

The illustration below is for left-hand drive vehicles.

The button positions and shapes may differ slightly for right-

hand drive vehicles.

Repeat play

Playback

Playback/Pause

Go back

Song selec-

Shuffle play-

iPod menu/

Song selection

Power Vol-

Displays text message

Song selection

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

290

3-2. Using the audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Play mode list

Selecting a list

Press or to display the first selection list.

Press to select the desired item.

Pressing changes to the second selection list.

Repeat the same procedure to select the desired item.

To return to the previous selection list, select “GO BACK” or

press ().

Play mode First

selection Second

selection Third

selection Fourth

selection

“PLAY-

LISTS” Playlists

select Songs select - -

“ARTISTS” Artists select Albums

select Songs select -

“ALBUMS” Albums

select Songs select - -

“SONGS” Songs select ---

“POD-

CASTS”

Albums

select Songs select - -

“GENRES” Genre select Artists select Albums

select Songs select

“COMPOS-

ERS”

Composers

select Albums

select Songs select -

“AUDIO-

BOOKS”

Songs select ---

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

291

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Selecting songs

Turn or press “” or “” on to select the desired song.

Playing and pausing songs

To play or pause a song, press ( ).

Fast-forwarding and rewinding songs

To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold “” or “” on

until you hear a beep.

Shuffle playback

Playing songs from one playlist or album in random order

Press (RAND).

Playing songs from all the playlists or albums in random order

Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep.

Repeat play

Press (RPT).

Switching the display

Press .

Each time is pressed, the display changes in the order of

Elapsed time  Album title  Track title  Artist name.

292

3-2. Using the audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Adjusting sound quality and volume balance

Press to enter iPod menu mode.

Pressing changes sound modes. (P. 304)

STEP 1

STEP 2

293

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

About iPod

Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compli-

ance with safety and regulatory standards.

iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other coun-

tries.

iPod functions

When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod

mode, the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last

used.

Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions

may not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction

(as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and

reconnecting it once again may resolve the problem.

While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own

controls. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle's audio system

instead.

iPod problems

To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect

your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it.

For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner’s Man-

ual.

Display

Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.

If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding until you

hear a beep will display the remaining characters.

A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.

If is pressed until you hear a beep again or has not been pressed for 6

seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.

Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed

properly or may not be displayed at all.

294

3-2. Using the audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Canceling shuffle and repeat playback

Press (RAND) or (RPT) again.

Error messages

“ERROR”:This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.

“NO MUSIC”:This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.

“EMPTY”: This indicates that some available songs are not found in a

selected playlist.

“UPDATE”: This indicates that the version of the iPod is not compatible.

Upgrade your iPod software to the latest version.

Compatible models

Depending on differences between models or software version etc., some

models listed above might be incompatible with this system.

iPod 4th generation and earlier models are not compatible with this system.

iPhone, iPod mini, iPod shuffle and iPod photo are not compatible with this

system.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:

Maximum number of lists in device: 9999

Maximum number of songs in device: 65535

Maximum number of songs per list: 65535

Model Generation Software version

iPod 5th generation Ver. 1.2.0 or higher

iPod nano 1st generation Ver. 1.3.0 or higher

2nd generation Ver. 1.1.2 or higher

3rd generation Ver. 1.0.0 or higher

iPod touch 1st generation Ver. 1.1.0 or higher

iPod classic 1st generation Ver. 1.0.0 or higher

295

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Caution while driving

Do not connect iPod or operate the controls.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to iPod

Do not leave iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may

become high, resulting in damage to the player.

Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is

connected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.

Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or

its terminal.

296

3-2. Using the audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Operating a USB memory

Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the vehi-

cle speakers.

Connecting a USB memory

Open the cover and connect

the portable audio device.

Turn on the power of the

USB memory if it is not

turned on.

Push .

STEP 1

STEP 2

297

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Control panel

The illustration below is for left-hand drive vehicles.

The button positions and shapes may differ slightly for right-

hand drive vehicles.

Repeat play

Playback

Playback/Pause Folder selection

File selec-

Random play-

Power Vol-

Displays text message

File selec-

298

3-2. Using the audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Selecting a folder

Selecting folders one at a time

Press () or () to select the desired folder.

Returning to the first folder

Press and hold () until you hear a beep.

Selecting files

Turn or press “” or “” on to select the desired file.

Playing and pausing files

To play or pause a file, press ( ).

Fast-forwarding and rewinding files

To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold “” or “” on

until you hear a beep.

Random playback

Playing files from a folder in random order

Press (RAND).

Playing all the files from a USB memory in random order

Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep.

299

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Repeat play

Repeating a file

Press (RPT).

Repeating all the files in a folder

Press and hold (RPT) until you hear a beep.

Switching the display

Press .

Each time is pressed, the display changes in the order of

Elapsed time  Folder name  File name  Album title (MP3 only)

 Track title  Artist name.

USB memory functions

Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, the

device itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be avail-

able. If the device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a mal-

function (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device

and reconnecting it once again may resolve the problem.

If the USB memory still does not begin operation after being discon-

nected and reconnected, format the memory.

Display

Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.

If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding until you

hear a beep will display the remaining characters.

A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.

If is pressed until you hear a beep again or has not been pressed for 6

seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.

Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed

properly or may not be displayed at all.

Canceling random and repeat playback

Press (RAND) or (RPT) again.

300

3-2. Using the audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Error messages

“ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connec-

tion.

“NO MUSIC”:This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the

USB memory.

USB memory

Compatible devices

USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback

Compatible device formats

The following device formats can be used:

• USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12 mbps)

• File formats: FAT16/32 (Windows)

• Correspondence class: Mass storage class

MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above

may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be

displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels

• Maximum number of folders in a device: 999 (including the root)

• Maximum number of files in a device: 65025

• Maximum number of files per folder: 255

MP3 and WMA files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using

MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.

This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3

format.

There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and

to the media/formats on which the files are recorded.

301

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards

MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III,

MPEG2.5)

• Compatible sampling frequencies

MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)

MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)

MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-160 (kbps)

MPEG2.5: 32-160 (kbps)

• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and mon-

aural

WMA file compatibility

• Compatible standards

WMA Ver. 9

• Compatible sampling frequencies

HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates

HIGH PROFILE 32-320 (kbps, VBR)

File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those

with the extension .mp3 or .wma.

ID3 and WMA tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track

title, artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3

tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the

track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

302

3-2. Using the audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

MP3 and WMA playback

• When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in

the USB memory device are checked. Once the file check is finished,

the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish

more quickly, we recommend that you do not include any files other

than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.

• When the USB memory is connected and the audio source is changed

to USB memory mode, the USB memory will start playing the first file

in the first folder. If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the

contents have not been changed), the USB memory will resume play

from the same point in which it was last used.

Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and

WMA files, they will be skipped (not played).

Playback

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed

bit rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.

• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for

MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of

the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the

start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be pos-

sible at all.

• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks

of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.

CAUTION

Caution while driving

Do not connect USB memory or operate the controls.

303

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

NOTICE

To prevent damage to USB memory

Do not leave USB memory in the vehicle. The temperature inside the

vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.

Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory

while it is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.

Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB

memory or its terminal.

304

3-2. Using the audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Optimal use of the audio system

Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)

Press .

The ASL switches between on and off modes each time

is pressed.

ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to

the noise level as you drive your vehicle.

Adjusting sound quality and volume balance

Changing sound quality modes

Press .

Pressing changes the sound mode in the following order:

“BAS”“MID”“TRE”“FAD”“BAL”

The illustration below is for left-hand drive vehicles.

The button positions and shapes may differ slightly for right-hand

drive vehicles.

Adjusting the sound qual-

Changing the sound quality

Adjusting the

305

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Adjusting sound quality

Press or to adjust the level.

*:The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio mode.

Mode

displayed Sound qual-

ity mode Level Press Press 

“BAS”*Bass -5 to 5

Low High“MID”*Mid-range -5 to 5

“TRE”*Treble -5 to 5

“FAD” Front/rear

volume

balance F7 to R7 Shifts to rear Shifts to

front

“BAL” Left/right

volume

balance L7 to R7 Shifts to left Shifts to

right

306

3-2. Using the audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Using the AUX port

Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system

The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other

adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.

When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet

Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable

audio device.

This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it

through the vehicle's speakers.

Open the cover and connect

the portable audio device.

Push .

STEP 1

STEP 2

307

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Using the steering wheel audio switches

Turning on the power

Press when the audio system is turned off.

The audio system can be turned off by holding down until you

hear a beep.

Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steer-

ing wheel.

Turns the power on, selects

an audio source

Increases/decreases vol-

ume

Radio mode:Selects a

radio station

CD mode:Selects a track,

file (MP3 and

WMA) and disc

Bluetooth® audio mode:

Selects a track

and album

iPod mode:

Selects a song

USB memory mode:

Selects a file and

308

3-2. Using the audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Changing the audio source

Press when the audio system is turned on. The audio source

changes as follows each time is pressed. If no discs are

inserted in the player, or if the external device is not connected,

that mode will be skipped.

FM1FM2FM3CD playerBluetooth®audioAUX

iPod or USB memoryMWDAB

Adjusting the volume

Press “+” on to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the

volume.

Hold down to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.

Selecting a radio station

Press to select radio mode.

Press “” or “” on to select a radio station.

To scan for receivable stations, press and hold until you

hear a beep.

Selecting a track/file or song

Press to select CD, Bluetooth® audio, iPod or USB

memory mode.

Press “” or “” on to select the desired track/file or

song.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

309

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Selecting an album

Press to select Bluetooth® audio mode.

Press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a beep.

Selecting a folder

Press to select USB memory mode.

Press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a beep.

Selecting a disc in the CD player

Press to select CD mode.

Press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a beep.

CAUTION

To reduce the risk of an accident

Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

308

IS250/220d/200d_EE

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Bluetooth® audio system

Conditions under which the system will not operate

If using a portable player that does not support Bluetooth®

If the portable player is switched off

If the portable player is not connected

If the portable player’s battery is low

If the portable player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console

box

If metal is covering or touching the portable player

The Bluetooth® audio system enables you to enjoy music played on a

portable digital audio player (portable player) from the vehicle speak-

ers via wireless communication.

This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system capa-

ble of playing portable audio music without cables. If your portable

player does not support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio system will

not function.

Vehicles with a navigation system

Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should

refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.

Vehicles without a navigation system

Title Page

Using the Bluetooth® audio system P. 313

Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player P. 316

Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player P. 319

Bluetooth®audio system setup P 322

309

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

When transferring ownership of the vehicle

Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improp-

erly accessed. ( P. 345)

About Bluetooth®

Compatible models

Bluetooth® specifications:

Ver. 1.1 or higher (Recommended: 1.2)

Following profiles:

• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher (Con-

formed: Ver. 1.2)

• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher

(Conformed: Ver. 1.3)

Portable players must correspond to the above specifications in order to be

connected to the Bluetooth® audio system. However, please note that some

functions may be limited depending on the type of portable player.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

310

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Certification for the Bluetooth® audio system

311

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

312

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Caution while driving

Do not connect portable players or operate the controls.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to portable players

Do not leave portable players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the

vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.

313

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Audio unit

The illustration below is for left-hand drive vehicles.

The button positions and shapes may differ slightly for right-

hand drive vehicles.

Display

A message, name, num-

ber, etc. is displayed.

Lower-case characters and

special characters cannot

be displayed.

Displays information that

is too long to be displayed

at one time on the display

(press and hold)

Selects items such as menu

and number

: Selects an

item

: Inputs the selected

item

Bluetooth® connection

condition

If “BT” is not displayed,

the Bluetooth® audio sys-

314

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Using the Bluetooth® audio system for the first time

Before using the Bluetooth® audio system, it is necessary to regis-

ter a Bluetooth® enabled portable player in the system. Follow the

procedure below to register (pair) a portable player:

Press and select “BT•A MENU” using ,

and .

Select “BT•A Setup” using , and .

Select “Pair Audio” using , and .

Select “Record Name” using , and , and

say the name to be registered after the beep.

The name to be registered will be repeated aloud.

Select “Confirm” using , and .

A passkey will be displayed.

Input the passkey into the audio player.

Refer to the manual that comes with the portable player for the

operation of the portable player.

If the portable player has a Bluetooth® phone, the phone can be

registered at the same time.

When “Pair Phone?” is displayed, select “Yes” or “No”

using , and . (Bluetooth® phone  P.

326)

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

STEP 7

315

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Menu list of the Bluetooth® audio system

First menu Second

menu Third menu Operation detail

“Setup”

“BT•A

Setup”

“Pair Audio” Registering a portable player

“Select Audio” Selecting a portable player to

be used

“Change Name” Changing the registered

name of a portable player

“List Audios” Listing the registered porta-

ble players

“Set Passkey” Changing the passkey

“Delete Audio” Deleting a registered porta-

ble player

“System

Setup”

“Guidance Vol” Setting voice guidance vol-

ume

“Device Name” Displaying the Bluetooth®

device address and name

“Initialize” Initializing the system

Operations that cannot be performed while driving

Operating the system with , and

Registering a portable player to the system

Changing the passkey

P. 321

316

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player

The illustration below is for left-hand drive vehicles.

The button positions and shapes may differ slightly for right-hand

drive vehicles.

Repeat play

Playback

Playback/Pause Album selec-

Track selec-

Random play-

Power Vol-

Displays text message

BT•A menu

317

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Selecting an album

To select the desired album, press () or ().

Selecting tracks

Press “” or “” on to select the desired track.

Playing and pausing tracks

To play or pause a track, press ( ).

Fast-forwarding and rewinding tracks

To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold “” or “” on

until you hear a beep.

Random playback

Press (RAND).

Repeat play

Press (RPT).

Switching the display

Press .

Each time is pressed, the display changes in the order of

Elapsed time  Album title  Track title  Artist name.

318

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Using the steering wheel audio switches

P. 307

Bluetooth® audio system functions

Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain

functions may not be available.

Display

Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.

If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding until you

hear a beep will display the remaining characters.

A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.

If is pressed until you hear a beep again or has not been pressed for 6

seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.

Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed

properly or may not be displayed at all.

Canceling random and repeat playback

Press (RAND) or (RPT) again.

Error messages

“Memory Error”: This indicates a problem in the system.

319

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player

Registering a portable player in the Bluetooth® audio system allows

the system to function. The following functions can be used for regis-

tered portable players:

Functions and operation procedures

To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below.

Press to select “BT•A MENU” or press the off-

hook switch and select “Setup” using , and

Select “BT•A Setup” using , and .

Select one of the following items using , and

Registering a portable player

“Pair Audio”

Selecting a portable player to be used

“Select Audio”

Changing the registered name of a portable player

“Change Name”

Listing the registered portable players

“List Audios”

Changing the passkey

“Set Passkey”

Deleting a registered portable player

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

320

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Registering a portable player

Select “Pair Audio” using , and , and perform

the procedure for registering a portable player. (P. 314)

Selecting a portable player to be used

Select “Select Audio” using , and .

Select the portable player to be used using , and

Select “From Car” or “From Audio” using ,

and .

If “From Car” is selected, the portable player will be automati-

cally connected whenever the “ENGINE START STOP” switch

is in either ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.

Changing the registered name of a portable player

Select “Change Name” using , and .

Select the desired portable player name to be changed using

, and .

Select “Record Name” using , and , and

say the new name after the beep.

The name to be registered will be repeated aloud.

Select “Confirm” using , and .

Listing the registered portable players

Select “List Audios” using , and . The list of reg-

istered portable players will be read aloud.

When listing is complete, the system returns to “BT•A Setup”.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

321

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Changing the passkey

Select “Set Passkey” using , and .

Select a 4 to 8-digit number using , and .

The number should be input 1 digit at a time.

When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has

been input, press again.

If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing is not

necessary.

Deleting a registered portable player

Select “Delete Audio” using , and .

Select the desired portable player to be deleted using ,

and .

If the portable player to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth® phone,

the registration of the mobile phone can be deleted at the same

time.

When “Del Phone?” is displayed, select “Yes” or “No”

using , and . (Bluetooth® phone  P.

326)

The number of portable players that can be registered

Up to 2 portable players can be registered in the system.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

322

3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Bluetooth® audio system setup

System setup items and operation procedures

To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below.

Press to select “BT•A MENU” or press the off-

hook switch and select “Setup” using , and

Select “System Setup” using , and .

Select one of the following items using , and

Setting voice guidance volume

“Guidance Vol” (P. 344)

Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name

“Device Name” (P. 345)

Initializing the system

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

323

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Hands-free system for mobile phones

The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your mobile

phone without touching it.

This system supports Bluetooth® mobile phones. Bluetooth® is a

wireless data system that allows the mobile phone to wirelessly con-

nect to the hands-free system and make/receive calls.

Vehicles with a navigation system

Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should

refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.

Vehicles without a navigation system

Hands-free system quick guide

Setting a mobile phone. (P. 333)

Adding an entry to the phonebook. (Up to 20 names can

be stored) (P. 348)

Dialing by inputting a name. (P. 338)

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

324

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Title Page

Using the hands-free system

Using the hands-free phone system for

the first time P. 333

Making a phone call

Making a phone call

• Dialing by inputting a name

• Speed dialing

•Redial

• Call back

Receiving a phone call

• Answering a phone call

• Refusing a phone call

Transferring a phone call

Using the call history memory

• Dialing

• Storing data in the phone book

• Deleting

P. 337

Setting a mobile phone

Functions and operation procedures P. 341

Security and system setup

Security setting items and operation

procedures

System setup items and operation

procedures

P. 344

325

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Title Page

Using the phone book

Adding a new phone number

Changing the registered name in the

phone book

Listing the registered data

Setting speed dials

Deleting the registered data

Deleting speed dials

P. 348

326

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Conditions under which the system will not operate

If using a mobile phone that does not support Bluetooth®

If the mobile phone is switched off

If you are outside service range

If the mobile phone is not connected

If the mobile phone's battery is low

If the mobile phone is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box

If metal is covering or touching the phone

When using the hands-free system

The audio system and voice guidance are muted when making a call.

If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.

If the incoming call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.

Try to face toward the microphone as much as possible when speaking.

In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other

party:

• When driving on unpaved roads

• When driving at high speeds

• When a window is open

• When the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone

• When the air conditioning is set to high

327

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

When transferring ownership of the vehicle

Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improp-

erly accessed. (P. 346)

About Bluetooth®

Compatible models

Compatible with HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Conformed:

Ver. 1.5) and OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1.

If your mobile phone does not support HFP, you cannot enter the Blue-

tooth® phone. If your mobile phone supports OPP alone, you cannot use the

Bluetooth® phone.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

328

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Certification for the hands-free system

329

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

330

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Caution while driving

Do not use a mobile phone or connect the Bluetooth® phone.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to mobile phones

Do not leave mobile phones in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehi-

cle may become high, resulting in damage to the phone.

331

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Using the hands-free system (for mobile phones)

Audio unit

The illustration below is for left-hand drive vehicles.

The button positions and shapes may differ slightly for right-

hand drive vehicles.

Display

A message, name, phone

number, etc. is displayed.

Lower-case characters and

special characters cannot

be displayed.

Displays information that

is too long to be displayed

at one time on the display

(press and hold)

Selects speed dials

Selects items such as menu

and number

: Selects an

item

: Inputs the selected

item

Bluetooth® connection

condition

If “BT” is not displayed,

the hands-free phone sys-

tem cannot be used.

332

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Steering wheel switches

Volume

During an incoming call:

Adjusts the ring tone vol-

ume

During an ongoing call:

Adjusts the receiver vol-

ume

The voice guidance volume

cannot be adjusted using this

button.

Off-hook switch

Turns the hands-free sys-

tem on/starts a call

On-hook switch

Turns the hands-free sys-

tem off/ends a call/refuses

a call

Talk switch

Turns the voice command

system on (press)/turns the

voice command system off

(press and hold)

Microphone

333

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Using the hands-free phone system for the first time

Before using the hands-free phone system, it is necessary to regis-

ter a mobile phone in the system. The system will enter phone reg-

istration mode automatically when starting the system with no

mobile phone registered. Follow the procedure below to register

(pair) a mobile phone:

Press the off-hook switch or the talk switch, and select “Pair

Phone” using , and .

Select “Record Name” using , and , and

say the name to be registered after the beep.

The name to be registered will be repeated aloud.

Select “Confirm” using , and .

A passkey will be displayed.

Input the passkey into the mobile phone.

Refer to the manual that comes with the mobile phone for the

operation of the phone.

If the mobile phone has a Bluetooth® audio player, the audio

player can be registered at the same time.

When “Pair Audio?” is displayed, select “Yes” or “No”

using , and . (Bluetooth® audio player

P. 309)

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

334

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Menu list of the hands-free phone system

First menu Second

menu Third menu Operation detail

“Callback” --Dialing a number stored in

the incoming call history

memory

“Redial” --Dialing a number stored in

the outgoing call history

memory

“Phone-

book”

“Add

Entry” -Adding a new phone number

“Change

Name” -Changing the registered

name in the phone book

“Delete

Entry” -Deleting the registered data

“Del Spd

Dial” -Deleting speed dials

“List

Names” -Listing the registered data

“Speed

Dial” -Setting speed dials

335

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

“Setup”

“Security”

“Set PIN” Setting a PIN code

“Phbk Lock” Locking the phone book

“Phbk Unlock” Unlocking the phone book

“Phone

Setup”

“Pair Phone” Registering a mobile phone

“Select Phone” Selecting a mobile phone to

be used

“Change Name” Changing the registered

name of a mobile phone

“List Phones” Listing the registered mobile

phones

“Set Passkey” Changing the passkey

“Delete Phone” Deleting a registered mobile

phone

“System

Setup”

“Guidance Vol” Setting voice guidance vol-

ume

“Device Name” Displaying the Bluetooth®

device address and name

“Initialize” Initializing the system

First menu Second

menu Third menu Operation detail

336

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Automatic volume adjustment

When vehicle speed reaches 80 km/h (50 mph) or more, the volume auto-

matically increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting

when vehicle speed drops to 70 km/h (43 mph) or less.

Operations that cannot be performed while driving

Operating the system with , and

Registering a mobile phone to the system

Changing the passkey

P. 343

337

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Making a phone call

Making a phone call

Dialing by inputting a name

“Dial by name”

Speed dialing

Dialing a number stored in the outgoing history memory

“Redial”

Dialing a number stored in the incoming history memory

“Call back”

Receiving a phone call

Answering a phone call

Refusing a phone call

Transferring a phone call

Using the call history memory

Dialing

Storing data in the phone book

Deleting

338

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Dialing by inputting a name

Press the talk switch and say a registered name.

The desired name or number is displayed.

Dial by one of the following methods:

a. Press the off-hook switch.

b. Select “Dial” using , and .

In , if the pronounced name cannot be recognized, select

the desired name using , and .

Speed dialing

Press the off-hook switch.

Press the preset button in which the desired number is regis-

tered.

Press the off-hook switch.

When receiving a phone call

Answering a phone call

Press the off-hook switch.

Refusing a phone call

Press the on-hook switch.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

339

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Transferring a phone call

A call can be transferred between the mobile phone and system

while dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the fol-

lowing methods:

a. Operate the mobile phone.

Refer to the manual that comes with the mobile phone for the

operation of the phone.

b. Press the off-hook switch*.

*:This operation can be performed only when transferring a call

from the mobile phone to the system during a call.

340

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Using the call history memory

Follow the procedure below to use a number stored in the call his-

tory memory:

Press the off-hook switch and select “Redial” (when using a

number stored in the outgoing call history memory) or

“Call back” (when using a number stored in the incoming

call history memory) using , and .

Select the desired number using , and .

The following operations can be performed:

Dialing: Press the off-hook switch or select “Dial” using ,

and .

Storing the number in the phone book: Select “Store” and then

“Confirm” using , and .

Deleting: Select “Delete” and then “Confirm” using ,

and .

Call history

Up to 5 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing and incoming call

history memories.

When talking on the phone

Do not talk at the same time as the other party.

Keep the volume of the incoming voice down. Otherwise, voice echo

will increase.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

341

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Setting a mobile phone

Registering a mobile phone in the hands-free phone system allows the

system to function. The following functions can be used for registered

mobile phones:

Functions and operation procedures

To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below.

Press the off-hook switch and select “Setup” using ,

and .

Select “Phone Setup” using , and .

Select one of the following items using , and

Registering a mobile phone

“Pair Phone”

Selecting a mobile phone to be used

“Select Phone”

Changing the registered name of a mobile phone

“Change Name”

Listing the registered mobile phones

“List Phones”

Changing the passkey

“Set Passkey”

Deleting a registered mobile phone

“Delete Phone”

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

342

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Registering a mobile phone

Select “Pair Phone” using , and , and perform

the procedure for registering a mobile phone. (P. 333)

Selecting a mobile phone to be used

Select “Select Phone” using , and .

Select the mobile phone to be used using , and

Changing the registered name of a mobile phone

Select “Change Name” using , and .

Select the desired mobile phone name to be changed using

, and .

Select “Record Name” using , and , and

say the new name after the beep.

The name to be registered will be repeated aloud.

Select “Confirm” using , and .

Listing the registered mobile phones

Select “List Phones” using , and . The list of reg-

istered mobile phones will be read aloud.

When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phone Setup”.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

343

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Changing the passkey

Select “Set Passkey” using , and .

Select a 4 to 8-digit number using , and .

The number should be input 1 digit at a time.

When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has

been input, press again.

If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing is not

necessary.

Deleting a registered mobile phone

Select “Delete Phone” using , and .

Select the desired mobile phone to be deleted using ,

and .

If the mobile phone to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth® audio

player, the registration of the audio player can be deleted at the

same time.

When “Del Audio?” is displayed, select “Yes” or “No”

using , and . (Bluetooth® audio player

P. 309)

The number of mobile phones that can be registered

Up to 6 mobile phones can be registered in the system.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

344

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Security and system setup

To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below.

Security setting items and operation procedures

Press the off-hook switch and select “Setup” using ,

and .

Select “Security” using , and .

Select one of the following items using , and

Setting or changing the PIN (Personal Identification Num-

ber)

“Set PIN”

Locking the phone book

“Phbk Lock”

Unlocking the phone book

“Phbk Unlock”

System setup items and operation procedures

Press the off-hook switch and select “Setup” using ,

and .

Select “System Setup” using , and .

Select one of the following items using , and

Setting voice guidance volume

“Guidance Vol”

Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name

“Device Name”

Initializing the system

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

345

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Setting or changing the PIN

Setting a PIN

Select “Set PIN” using , and .

Enter a PIN using , and .

Input the code 1 digit at a time.

Changing the PIN

Select “Set PIN” using , and .

Enter the registered PIN using , and .

Enter a new PIN using , and .

Input the code 1 digit at a time.

Locking or unlocking the phone book

Select “Phbk Lock” or “Phbk Unlock” using ,

and .

Input a new PIN using , and , and select

“Confirm” using , and .

Input the code 1 digit at a time.

Setting voice guidance volume

Select “Guidance Vol” using , , and .

Change the voice guidance volume using , and

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

346

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name

Select “Device Name” using , and .

Press or to display the Bluetooth® device

address and name.

Select “Go Back” using , and to return to

“System Setup”.

Initializing the system

Select “Initialize” and then “Confirm” using ,

and .

Select “Confirm” again using , and .

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

347

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Initialization

The following data in the system can be initialized:

• Phone book

• Outgoing and incoming call history

• Speed dials

• Registered mobile phone data

• Security code

• Registered Bluetooth® enabled portable player data

• Passkeys for the mobile phones

• Passkey for the Bluetooth® audio players

• Guidance volume

• Receiver volume

• Ring tone volume

Once the initialization has been completed, the data cannot be restored to

its original state.

When the phone book is locked

The following functions cannot be used:

Dialing by inputting a name

Speed dialing

Dialing a number stored in the call history memory

Using the phone book

348

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Using the phone book

Adding a new phone number

The following methods can be used to add a new phone number:

Transferring data from the mobile phone

Inputting a phone number using , and

Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming call his-

tory

To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below.

Press the off-hook switch and select “Phonebook” using

, and .

Select one of the following items using , and

Adding a new phone number

“Add Entry”

Changing the registered name in the phone book

“Change Name”

Listing the registered data

“List Names”

Setting speed dials

“Speed Dial”

Deleting the registered data

“Delete Entry”

Deleting speed dials

“Del Spd Dial”

STEP 1

STEP 2

349

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Adding procedure

Select “Add Entry” using , and .

Use one of the following methods to input a telephone num-

ber:

Transferring data from the mobile phone:

STEP2-1Select “By Phone” and then “Confirm” using

, and .

STEP2-2When “Transfer” appears in the display, transfer

the data from the mobile phone.

Refer to the manual that comes with the mobile phone

for details on transferring data.

STEP2-3Select the desired data using , and

Inputting a phone number using , and :

STEP2-1Select “Manual Input” using , and

STEP2-2Input a phone number using , and

, and press again.

Input the phone number 1 digit at a time.

Selecting a phone number from the outgoing or incoming call his-

tory:

STEP2-1Select “Call History” using , and

STEP2-2Select “Outgoing” or “Incoming” using ,

and .

STEP2-3Select the desired data using , and

Select “Record Name” using , and , and

say the desired name after the beep.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

350

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

The name to be registered will be repeated aloud.

Select “Confirm” using , and .

Select “Confirm” again using , and .

In , selecting “Speed Dial” instead of “Confirm” registers

the newly added phone number as a speed dial.

STEP 4

STEP 5

351

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Changing the registered name in the phone book

Select “Change Name” using , and .

Select the desired name to be changed using ,

and .

Select “Record Name” using , and , and

say the new name after the beep.

The name to be registered will be repeated aloud.

Select “Confirm” using , and .

Listing the registered data

Select “List Names” using , and . The list of the

registered data will be read aloud.

When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phonebook”.

Pressing the off-hook switch while an entry is being read aloud

selects the entry and calls the registered phone number.

Setting speed dials

Select “Speed Dial” using , and .

Select the desired data using , and .

Select the desired preset button and register the data into

speed dial by either of the following methods:

a. Press the desired preset button and select “Confirm”

using , and .

b. Press and hold the desired preset button.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

352

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for mobile phones)

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Deleting the registered data

Select “Delete Entry” using , and .

Select the desired data to be deleted using , and

Deleting speed dials

Select “Del Spd Dial” using , and .

Press the preset button to which the desired speed dial is

registered after the beep.

The name to be deleted will be heard.

Select “Confirm” using , and .

Limitation of number of digits

A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

351

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

3-5. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list

Your Lexus is equipped with the illuminated entry system to assist in

entering the vehicle. Owing to the function of the system, the lights

shown in the following illustration automatically turn on/off according

to the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/

unlocked, whether the doors are opened/closed, and the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch mode.

Front personal lights (P. 354)

Front interior lights (P. 353)

Front overhead courtesy light

Rear personal lights ( P. 354)

Rear interior light

Rear overhead courtesy light

Shift lever light (when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch

is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode)

352

3-5. Using the interior lights

IS250/220d/200d_EE

To prevent battery discharge

If the overhead courtesy lights and interior lights remain on when the door is

not fully closed and the interior light switch (door position on/off) is on, the

lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.

Customization that can be configured at any authorized Lexus dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional

Settings (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.

(Customizable features P. 556)

Front door courtesy light

Front scuff lights (if equipped)

Outer foot lights

Turning the instrument panel light control knob fully to the left dis-

ables the shift lever light and front footwell lights.

353

3-5. Using the interior lights

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Interior lights

Models without a moon roof

Door position on/off

On/off

Models with a moon roof

Door position on/off

On/off

Interior lights

354

3-5. Using the interior lights

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Personal lights

Front (models without a moon roof)

On/off

Front (models with a moon roof)

On/off

Rear

On/off

Personal lights

355

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

3-6. Using the storage features

List of storage features

CAUTION

Items that should not be left in the storage spaces

Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may

cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:

Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact

with other stored items.

Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other

stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas,

causing a fire hazard.

Glove box

Console boxes

Cup holders

Bottle holders/door pockets

Overhead console (if equipped)

Auxiliary box (if equipped)

356

3-6. Using the storage features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Glove box

Open (push button)

Lock with the mechanical

key

Unlock with the mechanical

key

Console boxes

Front

Pull up the knob to release

the lock.

Slide the armrest.

Pull up the knob to release

the lock.

Lift the armrest to open.

Glove box light

The glove box light turns on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is

in IGNITION ON mode.

Trunk opener main switch

The trunk opener main switch is located in the glove box. (P. 64)

CAUTION

Caution while driving

Keep the glove box closed.

Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Glove box and console boxes

357

3-6. Using the storage features

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Rear (if equipped)

Press the button to release the

lock.

Lift the armrest to open.

Console box light (front)

The console box light turns on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is

in IGNITION ON mode.

Using the front console box to store CD cases

CAUTION

Caution while driving

Keep the console box closed.

Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Store a CD case with the hinged portion

facing either the front or back of the con-

sole box.

Console boxes

358

3-6. Using the storage features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Overhead console (if equipped)

The overhead console is useful

for temporarily storing sun-

glasses and similar small items.

CAUTION

Caution while driving

Do not leave the overhead console open while driving.

Items stored in it may fall out and cause injury.

Overhead console

359

3-6. Using the storage features

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Cup holders

Front (press-in type)

To open, press down and

release the front of the cup

holder lid.

Front (slide type)

Press the knob to release the

lock.

Slide the armrest.

Rear

To open, press in and release

the rear cup holder on the rear

center armrest.

Cup holders

360

3-6. Using the storage features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Bottle holders/door pockets

The door pockets can be

opened and closed.

When installing the bottle, close

the cap of the bottle.

Using the front cup holder (slide type) to store small items

CAUTION

Items unsuitable for the cup holder

Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.

Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or

sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent

burns.

When not in use

Keep the cup holders closed.

Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Remove the cup holder insert by holding

the base part.

Cup holders and bottle holders/door pockets

361

3-6. Using the storage features

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Auxiliary box (if equipped)

Push the back part of the lid to

open. Push the lid again to

close.

CAUTION

Caution while driving

Keep the door pockets closed.

Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

CAUTION

Caution while driving

Do not leave open while driving.

Items stored in the auxiliary box may fall out and cause death or serious

injury in case of an accident or sudden stop.

Bottle holders/door pockets and auxiliary box

362

IS250/220d/200d_EE

3-7. Other interior features

Sun visors

Forward position:

Flip down.

Side position:

Flip down, unhook, and

swing to the side.

363

3-7. Other interior features

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Vanity mirrors

Slide the cover.

The light turns on when the

cover is opened.

364

3-7. Other interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Clock

The clock is displayed when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION

ON mode.

Adjusts the hour.

Adjusts the minutes.

Rounds to the nearest

hour.*

*: e.g. 1:00 to 1:29 1:00

1:30 to 1:592:00

365

3-7. Other interior features

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Satellite switches

The satellite switches can be used to change the settings of various

features. Settings are shown on the multi-information display.

Operating the satellite switches

Bring up satellite switch

mode on the multi-informa-

tion display.

Press “”, “” or the “ON/

OFF” button.

Select the item whose setting

is to be changed.

Press “” or “” to display

the item whose setting is to

be changed.

STEP 1

STEP 2

366

3-7. Other interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Change the settings.

Press the “ON/OFF” button

to change the settings (e.g.

on/off).

Items that can be set using the satellite switches

STEP 3

Intrusion sensor (P. 102) on/off (if

equipped)

Lexus parking assist-sensor (P. 217) on/off

(if equipped)

Daytime running light (P. 188) on/off

(if equipped)

Priming operation (IS220d and IS200d)

(P. 528)

Vehicle speed indicator on/off and speed set-

ting (P. 173)

Tacho indicator on/off and engine speed (rpm)

setting (P. 173)

367

3-7. Other interior features

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Changing the settings

Each item is displayed and its setting can be changed only in the following

conditions:

Intrusion sensor: When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is off and

the auto alarm is not set.

Lexus parking assist-sensor: When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch

is in IGNITION ON mode.

Items other than the above: When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch

is in IGNITION ON mode and the vehicle is stopped.

Display

The display will return to the original display if the satellite switches are not

operated for an extended period.

Even if the display is in satellite switch mode, it will switch in the event of a

warning or when the dynamic radar cruise control (if equipped) is used. If

this occurs, press any of the satellite switches or “DISP” switch on the steer-

ing wheel to return the display to satellite switch mode.

Pre-crash braking function (P. 231) on/off

(if equipped)

Automatic folding and extending feature of

the rear view mirrors on/off (P. 84) (if

equipped)

368

3-7. Other interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Ashtrays

CAUTION

When not in use

Keep the ashtray closed.

Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an

accident.

To prevent fire

Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray,

then make sure the ashtray is fully closed.

Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.

Front

Push the back part of the lid

to open. Push the lid again to

close.

Push the lever to remove the

ashtray.

Rear

Pull the ashtray lid to open.

Hold the plate down and pull

the ashtray upwards to

remove.

: If equipped

369

3-7. Other interior features

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Cigarette lighter

The cigarette lighter can be used when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION

ON mode.

CAUTION

When not in use

Keep the lid closed.

Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

To avoid burns or fires

Do not touch the metal parts of the cigarette lighter.

Do not hold the cigarette lighter down. It could overheat and cause a fire.

Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter into the outlet.

Push the back part of the lid

to open, and push the ciga-

rette lighter down.

The cigarette lighter will pop

up when it is ready for use.

: If equipped

370

3-7. Other interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Power outlet

The power outlet can be used when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION

ON mode.

NOTICE

To avoid damaging the power outlet

Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.

Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short cir-

cuit.

To prevent the fuse from being blown

Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.

To prevent the battery from being discharged

Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not

running.

The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on less than

10 A.

371

3-7. Other interior features

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Seat heaters

Vehicles with an automatic transmission

Heats the seats

The indicator light comes on.

The higher the number, the

warmer the seats become.

Left front seat Right front

: If equipped

372

3-7. Other interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

The seat heaters can be used when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

When not in use

Set the dial to “0”. The indicator light turns off.

Vehicles with a manual transmission

Heats the seats

The indicator light comes on.

The higher the number, the

warmer the seats become.

Left front Right front

373

3-7. Other interior features

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Burns

Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat

heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:

• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled

• Persons with sensitive skin

• Persons who are fatigued

• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping

drugs, cold remedies, etc.)

Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.

Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature

of the seat and may lead to overheating.

NOTICE

To prevent seat heater damage

Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp

objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.

To prevent battery discharge

Turn the switches off when the engine is off.

374

3-7. Other interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Seat heaters and ventilators

The seat heaters and ventilators heat the seats and maintain good air-

flow by blowing air from the seats.

Vehicles with an automatic transmission

Heats the seats

The indicator light (amber)

comes on.

The higher the number, the

warmer the seats become.

Blows air from the seats

The indicator light (green)

comes on.

The higher the number, the

stronger the airflow becomes.

Left front seat Right front

: If equipped

375

3-7. Other interior features

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

The seat heaters and ventilators can be used when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

When not in use

Set the dial to “0”. The indicator light turns off.

Vehicles with a manual transmission

Heats the seats

The indicator light (amber)

comes on.

The higher the number, the

warmer the seats become.

Blows air from the seats

The indicator light (green)

comes on.

The higher the number, the

stronger the airflow becomes.

Left front Right front

376

3-7. Other interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Burns

Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat

heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:

• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled

• Persons with sensitive skin

• Persons who are fatigued

• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping

drugs, cold remedies, etc.)

Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.

Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature

of the seat and may lead to overheating.

NOTICE

To prevent seat heaters and ventilators damage

Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp

objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.

To prevent battery discharge

Turn the switches off when the engine is off.

377

3-7. Other interior features

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Armrest

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the armrest

Do not place too much strain on the armrest.

Pull the armrest down for

use.

378

3-7. Other interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Rear sunshade

Reverse operation feature

This function will become operational after the vehicle has been driven at

15 km/h (9 mph) or more with the rear sunshade in the raised position.

To ensure adequate rear visibility, the sunshade automatically lowers when

the shift lever is shifted to R and the function is in an operational condition.

However, the rear sunshade is raised again if either of the following occurs:

The switch is pressed again.

The shift lever is shifted out of R, and the vehicle reaches a speed of 15

km/h (9 mph).

If the engine is turned off when the rear sunshade has been lowered due to

the reverse operation feature, it will not be raised even when the engine is

turned on again and the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 km/h (9 mph). To raise

the sunshade again, press the switch.

The rear sunshade can be used when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered by operating the switch

shown below.

Raise/lower

: If equipped

379

3-7. Other interior features

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

When the rear sunshade is being raised or lowered

Do not place fingers or other objects in the fastener section or in the open-

ing.

They may get caught, causing injury.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being discharged

Do not operate the rear sunshade when the engine is off.

To ensure normal operation of the sunshade

Observe the following precautions.

Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components.

Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing opera-

tions.

Do not attach items to the rear sunshade.

Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions.

Do not operate the rear sunshade continuously over long periods of time.

380

3-7. Other interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Trunk storage extension

CAUTION

When not in use

Ensure that the inside trunk door is closed.

In the event of sudden braking, items stored in the trunk may be thrown for-

ward into the cabin, resulting in injury.

Long objects can be loaded in the vehicle by utilizing the trunk space

and rear seat area.

Pull down the rear seat arm-

rest.

Open the inside trunk door

from the trunk and load bag-

gage or other items.

STEP 1

STEP 2

381

3-7. Other interior features

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Coat hooks

CAUTION

Items that must not be hung on the hook

Do not hang a coat hanger or other hard or sharp object on the hook. If the

SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles that

cause death or serious injury.

To use the coat hook, push it

on.

382

3-7. Other interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Floor mat

Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same

model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto

the carpet.

Fix the floor mat in place

using the retaining hooks

(clips) provided.

The shape of the retaining

hooks (clips) and the fixing

procedure of the floor mat for

your vehicle may differ from

those shown in the illustra-

tion. For details, refer to the

floor mat retention clip

illii i

383

3-7. Other interior features

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering

with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it

may become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to a serious accident.

When installing the driver's floor mat

Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year

vehicles, even if they are Lexus Genuine floor mats.

Only use floor mats designed for the driver's seat.

Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) pro-

vided.

Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.

Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.

Before driving

Check that the floor mat is securely

fixed in the correct place with all the

provided retaining hooks (clips). Be

especially careful to perform this check

after cleaning the floor.

With the engine stopped and the shift

lever in P (automatic transmission) or

N (manual transmission), fully depress

each pedal to the floor to make sure it

does not interfere with the floor mat.

384

3-7. Other interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Trunk features

Cargo hooks

Cargo hooks are provided for

securing loose items.

Shopping bag hooks

First-aid kit storage belt

Loosen

Tighten

385

3-7. Other interior features

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Luggage mat

With a compact spare tire

The trunk floor can be made

flat using the luggage mat.

Remove the luggage

mat.

Install the separator to

the groove that is

located in the center

of the luggage tray.

Unfold the luggage

mat and place it on the

tray.

The luggage mat can be

folded to one side for use.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

386

3-7. Other interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

When the cargo hooks are not in use

To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their positions when they

are not in use.

NOTICE

When using the luggage mat (with a compact spare tire)

Always attach the separator.

Do not place anything that weighs 20 kg (44 lb.) or more on the mat.

When closing the trunk (except with a compact spare tire)

Do not leave the luggage mat lever hooked on the edge of the trunk.

The luggage mat may get damaged.

With a full-size spare tire or an emergency tire puncture repair

kit

Pull the lever upwards when

lifting the luggage mat up.

The lever can be hooked on

the edge of the trunk.

387

3-7. Other interior features

Interior features

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Maintenance and care

387

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle exterior ........ 388

Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle interior......... 392

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance

requirements .................. 395

4-3. Do-it-yourself

maintenance

Do-it-yourself service

precautions..................... 398

Hood ................................ 401

Positioning a floor jack.... 402

Engine compartment........ 404

Tires ................................. 420

Tire inflation pressure...... 424

Wheels ............................. 426

Air conditioning filter...... 428

Electronic key battery...... 431

Checking and replacing

fuses............................... 433

Light bulbs....................... 448

388

IS250/220d/200d_EE

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior

Automatic car washes

Fold the mirrors back before washing the vehicle.

Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface

and harm your vehicle’s paint.

High pressure car washes

Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity

of the windows.

Before car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed

properly.

Touch-up paint (if equipped)

Touch-up paint may be used to cover small chips or scratches.

Apply the paint soon after the damage occurs or corrosion may set in. To

apply the touch-up paint so it is hardly noticeable the trick is to apply it only

to the bare spots. Apply only the smallest amount possible and do not paint

the surface around the scratch or chip.

Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime

condition.

Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the

vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to

remove any dirt and dust.

Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as

a chamois.

For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse

thoroughly with water.

Wipe away any water.

Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.

If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehi-

cle body is cool.

389

4-1. Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Aluminum wheels

Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use

hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical

cleaners.

Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.

Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after

driving for long distance in the hot weather.

Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.

Bumpers

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

Outside rear view mirror rain-clearing coating (if equipped)

Observe the following precautions in order to retain the rain-clearing prop-

erties of the mirror.

Clean the mirrors using car shampoo or glass cleaner that does not con-

tain silicone or an abrasive compound, and rinse thoroughly with water.

Allow the mirrors to be exposed to direct sunlight for 1 to 2 days.

CAUTION

When cleaning the windshield (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wip-

ers)

When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is

located is touched by hand

When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor

If something bumps against the windshield

If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into

the raindrop sensor

Set the wiper switch to off.

If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the

wipers may operate unexpectedly in the

following situations, and may result in

hands being caught or other serious inju-

ries and cause damage to the wiper

blades.

Off

390

4-1. Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Caution about the exhaust pipe

Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.

When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has

cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.

NOTICE

To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components

(aluminum wheels etc.)

Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

• After driving near the sea coast

• After driving on salted roads

• If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface

• If you see dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings on the paint

• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine

dust, iron powder or chemical substances

• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud

• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface

If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.

To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a

place with low humidity when storing the wheels.

Cleaning the exterior lights

Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.

This may damage the surfaces of the lights.

Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.

Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

To prevent damage to the windshield wiper arms

When lifting the wiper arms away from the windshield, pull the driver side

wiper arm upward first, and repeat for the passenger side. When returning

the wipers to their original position, do so from the passenger side first.

391

4-1. Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

NOTICE

When using an automatic car wash (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield

wipers only)

Set the wiper switch to the off position.

If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate and the wiper

blades may be damaged.

392

4-1. Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior

The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and

keep it in top condition:

Protecting the vehicle interior

Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty sur-

faces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.

Cleaning the leather areas

Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened

with diluted detergent.

Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool

detergent.

Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly

wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.

Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any

remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded

ventilated area.

Synthetic leather areas

Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.

Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather.

Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove

393

4-1. Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Caring for leather areas

Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year

to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.

Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a

sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply

water. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possi-

ble.

Seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also

check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

CAUTION

Water in the vehicle

Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.

Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch

fire.

Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior

wet.

(P. 111)

Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function

properly, resulting in death or severe injury.

Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)

Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect

off the windshield, obstructing the driver's view and leading to an accident,

resulting in death or serious injury.

394

4-1. Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

NOTICE

Cleaning detergents

Do not use organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, acidic or alka-

line solutions, dye, bleach or other detergent. Doing so may discolor the

vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.

Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel's or other

interior part’s painted surface may be damaged.

Preventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of

leather surfaces.

Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.

Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.

Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.

Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the

upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior

heats up significantly.

Water on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.

Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes

into contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and

may also cause the body to rust.

Cleaning the inside of the rear window

Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause dam-

age to the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth

dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe

the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.

Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.

395

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements

To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular

maintenance is essential. Lexus recommends the following mainte-

nance.

Scheduled maintenance

Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified

intervals according to the maintenance schedule.

For full details of your maintenance schedule, read the “Lexus

Service Booklet” or “Lexus Warranty Booklet”.

Do-it-yourself maintenance

What about do-it-yourself maintenance?

Many maintenance items are easy to do yourself if you have a lit-

tle mechanical ability and a few basic automotive tools.

Note, however, that some maintenance tasks require special tools

and skills. These are best performed by qualified technicians. Even

if you're an experienced do-it-yourself mechanic, we recommend

that repairs and maintenance be conducted by any authorized

Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional. Any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer will keep a

record of maintenance, which could be useful should you ever

require Warranty Service. Should you choose to select a qualified

and equipped professional other than an authorized Lexus repairer

396

4-2. Maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

397

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Where to go for service?

In order to maintain your vehicle in the highest possible condition, Lexus

recommends that all repairs and service operations be carried out by autho-

rized Lexus dealers or repairers or other duly qualified and equipped profes-

sionals. For repairs and services covered by your warranty, please visit an

authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, who will use genuine Lexus parts in

repairing any difficulties you may encounter. There can also be advantages

in utilizing authorized Lexus dealers or repairers for non-warranty repairs

and services, as members of the Lexus network will be able to expertly

assist you with any difficulties you may encounter.

Your Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-

fessional service department will perform all of the scheduled maintenance

on your vehicle - reliably and economically due to their experience with

Lexus vehicles.

Does your vehicle need repair?

Be on the alert for changes in performance and sounds, and visual tip-offs

that indicate service is needed. Some important clues are:

Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging

Appreciable loss of power

Strange engine noises

A fluid leak under the vehicle (However, water dripping from the air

conditioning after use is normal.)

Change in exhaust sound (This may indicate a dangerous carbon monox-

ide leak. Drive with the windows open and have the exhaust system

checked immediately.)

Flat-looking tires, excessive tire squeal when cornering, uneven tire

wear

Vehicle pulls to one side when driving straight on a level road

Strange noises related to suspension movement

Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling brake pedal, pedal almost

touches the floor, vehicle pulls to one side when braking

Engine coolant temperature continually higher than normal

If you notice any of these clues, take your vehicle to any authorized Lexus

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional, as

soon as possible. Your vehicle may need adjustment or repair.

398

4-2. Maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

If your vehicle is not properly maintained

It could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible serious injury or

death.

Warning in handling of the battery

Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead com-

pounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after han-

dling.

(P. 414)

398

IS250/220d/200d_EE

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions

If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct pro-

cedures as given in these sections.

Items Parts and tools

Battery condition (P. 415)

•Warm water

• Baking soda

• Grease

• Conventional wrench

(for terminal clamp bolts)

Engine coolant level (P. 413)

• “Toyota Super Long Life Cool-

ant” or similar high-quality eth-

ylene glycol-based non-silicate,

non-amine, non-nitrite and non-

borate coolant with long-life

hybrid organic acid technology.

“Toyota Super Long Life Cool-

ant” is pre-mixed with 50%

coolant and 50% deionized

water.

• Funnel (used only for adding

coolant)

Engine oil level P. 409)

• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or

equivalent

• Rag or paper towel, funnel

(used only for adding oil)

Fuses (P. 438) • Fuse with same amperage rating

as original

Radiator, condenser and inter-

cooler

399

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Items Parts and tools

Tire inflation pressure (P. 426) • Tire pressure gauge

• Compressed air source

Washer fluid (P. 420) • Water washer fluid containing

antifreeze (for winter use)

• Funnel

400

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may

move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death

or serious injury, observe the following precautions.

When working on the engine compartment

Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine

drive belt.

Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right

after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.

Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the

engine compartment.

Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery.

Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.

Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous

and corrosive sulfuric acid.

Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage

painted surfaces.

If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with

clean water immediately.

If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille

Be sure the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is OFF.

With the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION ON mode, the

electric cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is

on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (P. 415)

CAUTION

Safety glasses

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc.

from getting in the eyes.

401

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

NOTICE

If you remove the air cleaner

Driving with the air cleaner removed may cause excessive engine wear due

to dirt in the air. Also, a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compart-

ment.

If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads

wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.

402

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Hood

CAUTION

Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.

If the hood is not locked properly it may open while the vehicle is in motion

and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.

Pull the hood release lever.

The hood will pop up

slightly.

Lift auxiliary catch lever and

lift the hood.

STEP 1

STEP 2

403

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Positioning a floor jack

When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack cor-

rectly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.

Front

Rear

404

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

When raising your vehicle

Make sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of death or seri-

ous injury.

When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided

with the jack.

Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.

Do not put any part of your body or get underneath the vehicle supported

only by the floor jack.

Always use floor jack and/or automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level

surface.

Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.

Stop the vehicle on level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put

the shift lever in P (automatic transmission) or R (manual transmission).

Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.

Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage

the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.

Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.

When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath

the floor jack.

Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack

such as the one shown in the illustra-

tion.

405

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Engine compartment

IS250

*: For right-hand drive vehicles:

They are located on the opposite side of the engine compartment.

Battery (P. 415)

Engine oil level dipstick

(P. 409)

Engine oil filler cap

(P. 410)

Fuse boxes (P. 438)

Washer fluid tank(P. 420)

Electric cooling fans

Condenser (P. 415)

Radiator (P. 415)

Engine coolant reservoir

(P. 413)

406

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

IS220d and IS200d

*: For right-hand drive vehicles:

They are located on the opposite side of the engine compartment.

Battery (P. 415)

Engine oil level dipstick

(P. 409)

Engine oil filler cap

(P. 410)

Fuse boxes (P. 438)

Washer fluid tank(P. 420)

Electric cooling fans

Condenser (P. 415)

Intercooler (P. 415)

Radiator (P. 415)

Engine coolant reservoir

(P. 413)

407

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Engine compartment cover

Removing the engine compartment cover

Front

Outside (left-hand drive vehicles)

Outside (right-hand drive vehicles)

408

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Installing the clips

Press the tip of the clip

against a hard surface, such

as a desk, to allow the center

part of the clip to be pushed

up.

Insert

Press

NOTICE

After installing an engine compartment cover

Make sure that the cover is securely installed in its original position.

409

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Engine oil

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the

oil level on the dipstick.

Checking the engine oil

Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the

engine and turning it off, wait more than five minutes for

the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.

Hold a rag under the end and

pull the dipstick out.

Wipe the dipstick clean.

Reinsert the dipstick fully.

Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check

the oil level.

Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

Low

Full

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

410

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Adding engine oil

If the oil level is below or near

the low level mark, add engine

oil of the same type as already

in the engine.

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed

before adding oil.

Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.

Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.

Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.

Engine oil

selection P. 539

Oil quantity

(Low  Full) 1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 Imp. qt.)

Items Clean funnel

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

411

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Engine oil consumption

The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the

quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.

More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and

frequent acceleration and deceleration.

A new engine consumes more oil.

When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil

may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level

accurately.

Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1,000 km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp.

qt./600 miles)

If your vehicle consumes more than 1.0 L (1.1 qt., 0.9 Imp. qt.) every

1000 km (600 miles), contact any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional.

After changing the engine oil (IS220d and IS200d)

The oil change system should be reset. Perform the following procedures:

Switch the display to the odometer (P. 171) when the engine is

running.

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.

While pressing the trip meter reset button, set the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode (but do not start the

engine because otherwise the reset mode will be cancelled). Con-

tinue to press and hold the button until the trip meter displays

“000000”.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

412

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Used engine oil

Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may

cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should

be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine

oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.

Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do

not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the

ground.

Call any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional, service station or auto parts store for information

concerning recycling or disposal.

Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

NOTICE

To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on a regular basis.

When replacing the engine oil

Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.

Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.

Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.

Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

413

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Engine coolant

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and

“LOW” lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.

IS250

Reservoir cap

“FULL”

“LOW”

If the level is on or below the

“LOW” line, add coolant up to

the “FULL” line.

IS220d and IS200d

Reservoir cap

“FULL”

“LOW”

If the level is on or below the

“LOW” line, add coolant up to

the “FULL” line.

414

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing

Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap,

drain cock and water pump.

If you cannot find a leak, have any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional, test the cap and check for

leaks in the cooling system.

Coolant selection

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high-quality eth-

ylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate

coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50%

deionized water. (Enabled: -35C [-31F])

For more details about engine coolant, contact any authorized Lexus dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

CAUTION

When the engine is hot

Do not remove the radiator cap (IS250), or the coolant reservoir cap (IS220d

and IS200d).

The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the

cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.

NOTICE

When adding engine coolant

Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of

water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion

protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.

If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint.

415

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Radiator, condenser and intercooler

Check the radiator, condenser and intercooler and clear any foreign

objects.

If any of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of

their condition, have your vehicle checked by any authorized

Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional.

Battery

Check the battery as follows.

The meanings of each caution symbol on the top of the battery are

as follows:

CAUTION

When the engine is hot

Do not touch the radiator, condenser or intercooler as they may be hot and

cause serious injuries, such as burns.

No smoking, no naked

flames, no sparks Battery acid

Shield eyes Note operating

instructions

Keep away from chil-

dren Explosive gas

416

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Battery exterior

Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that

there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.

Terminals

Hold-down clamp

Checking battery fluid

Check that the level is between

“UPPER LEVEL” and

“LOWER LEVEL”.

“UPPER LEVEL”

“LOWER LEVEL”

If the fluid level is at or below

“LOWER LEVEL”, add dis-

tilled water.

417

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Adding distilled water

Remove the vent plug.

Add distilled water.

If the “UPPER LEVEL” line cannot be seen, check the fluid level

by looking directly at the cell.

Put the vent plug back on and close securely.

Lo O.K

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

418

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Before recharging

When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable

and explosive. Therefore, before recharging:

If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to discon-

nect the ground cable.

Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and

disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.

After recharging/reconnecting the battery

In some cases, the engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to ini-

tialize the system.

Shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or depress the

brake pedal with the shift lever in N (manual transmission), and

turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.

Open and close any of the doors.

Start the engine. (If the engine does not start first time, repeat the

procedure.)

If the engine will not start even after multiple attempts at the above method,

contact any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

419

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Chemicals in the battery

A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce

hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death

or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near

the battery:

Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.

Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.

Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.

Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.

Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.

Keep children away from the battery.

Where to safely charge the battery

Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a

garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.

Emergency measures regarding electrolyte

If electrolyte gets in your eyes

Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immedi-

ate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or

cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.

If electrolyte gets on your skin

Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical

attention immediately.

If electrolyte gets on your clothes

It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the

clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.

If you accidentally swallow electrolyte

Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention

immediately.

420

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Washer fluid

If any washer does not work or

the warning message appears

on the multi-information dis-

play, the washer tank may be

empty. Add washer fluid.

NOTICE

When recharging the battery

Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all

accessories are turned off.

When adding distilled water

Avoid overfilling. Water spilled during battery recharging may cause corro-

sion.

CAUTION

When adding washer fluid

Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as washer fluid

contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.

NOTICE

Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.

Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.

Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.

Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bot-

tle.

421

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Tires

422

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Replace the tires when the treadwear indicators show.

Checking tires

New tread

Treadwear indicator

Worn tread

The location of treadwear

indicators is shown by the

“TWI” or “ ” marks, etc.,

molded on the sidewall of

each tire.

Check spare tire condition

and inflation pressure if not

rotated.

Tire rotation

Models with 16-inch tires (with a compact spare tire or an

emergency tire puncture repair kit)

Rotate the tires in the order

shown.

To equalize tire wear and

help extend tire life, Lexus

recommends that you rotate

your tires approximately

every 10000 km (6000

miles).

Models with 16-inch tires (with a full-size spare tire)

Rotate the tires in the order

shown.

To equalize tire wear and

help extend tire life, Lexus

recommends that you rotate

your tires approximately

10000 k (6000

Front

423

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Directional tires

Tire direction marks

The tire sidewalls are marked

with arrows indicating the roll-

ing direction of the tire. If

mounted on the wrong side of

the vehicle, directional tires

will not perform properly.

The directional spare tire sup-

plied is for the front passenger

side of the vehicle. If mounted

on the front driver side or rear,

the directional tire will not per-

form properly.

Models with non-directional 18-inch tires

Rotate the tires in the order

shown.

To equalize tire wear and

help extend tire life, Lexus

recommends that you rotate

your tires approximately

every 10000 km (6000

miles).

Models with 17-inch or directional 18-inch tires

Tires cannot be rotated.

Front

424

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

When to replace your vehicle’s tires

Tires should be replaced if:

You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose

the fabric or bulges indicating internal damage

A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size

or location of a cut or other damage

If you are not sure, consult with any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional.

Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if

it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.

If the tread on snow tires wears down below 4 mm (0.16 in.)

The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.

Low profile tires (models not equipped with 16-inch tires)

Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance

will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires.

Be sure to use snow tires or tire chains* on snowy and/or icy roads and

drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather conditions.

*: Tire chains cannot be mounted on 18-inch tires.

CAUTION

When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.

Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dan-

gerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in

death or serious injury.

Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.

Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.

Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.

Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply

tires).

Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.

Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.

Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.

425

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

NOTICE

Driving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or pot holes.

These conditions may cause losses in tire air pressure, reducing the cushion-

ing ability of the tires. In addition driving on rough roads may cause damage

to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.

Low profile tires and wheels (vehicles with 17- and 18- inch tires)

Wheels with profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire

wheel when receiving impact from the road surface. Therefore pay attention

to the following:

Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated,

they may be damaged more severely.

Avoid pot holes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards.

Failure to do so may lead to severe tire and wheel damage.

If tire pressures become low while driving

Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

426

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Tire inflation pressure

Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:

Reduced fuel efficiency

Reduced driving comfort and tire life

Reduced safety

Damage to the drive train

If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by any authorized Lexus

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

Instructions for checking tire pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:

Check only when the tires are cold.

If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been

driven for more than 1.5 km or 1 mile, you will get an accurate cold tire

inflation pressure reading.

Always use a tire pressure gauge.

The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation

pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and han-

dling.

Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal

for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.

Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.

Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is

balanced.

Make sure to maintain the proper tire inflation pressure. Tire inflation

pressure should be checked at least once per month. However, Lexus

recommends that tire inflation pressure be checked once every two

weeks.

427

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may

occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury.

Excessive wear

Uneven wear

Poor handling

Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires

Poor sealing of the tire bead

Wheel deformation and/or tire separation

A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards

NOTICE

When inspecting and adjusting tire pressure

Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.

Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause

air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have been lost,

replace them as soon as possible.

428

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Wheels

If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced.

Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of han-

dling control.

Wheel selection

When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that

they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diame-

ter, rim width, and inset*.

Replacement wheels are available at any authorized Lexus

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-

fessional.

*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.

Lexus does not recommend using:

Wheels of different sizes or types

Used wheels

Bent wheels that have been straightened

Aluminum wheel precautions

Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use

with your aluminum wheels.

When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that

the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1600 km (1000

miles).

Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using

tire chains.

429

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

When replacing wheels

Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the

Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.

Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tube-

less tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing serious injury or

death.

430

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Air conditioning filter

431

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

The air conditioning filter must be cleaned or changed regularly to

maintain air conditioning efficiency.

Removal method

Set the air conditioning system to recirculated mode.

(P. 254)

The air conditioning filter case cannot be removed with the

system in the outside air mode.

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.

Open the glove box. Lift and

remove the partition.

Remove the filter cover.

Remove the filter case.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

432

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Checking interval

Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance

schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement

may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to

the “Lexus Service Booklet” or “Lexus Warranty Booklet”.)

If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

Cleaning method

If the filter is dirty, clean by

blowing compressed air

through the filter from the

downward side.

Hold the air gun 5 cm (2 in.)

from the filter and blow for

approximately 2 minutes at

500 kPa (5.0 kgf/cm2 or bar,

72 psi).

If it is not available, have the

filter cleaned by any autho-

rized Lexus dealer or

repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped pro-

fessional.

Replacement method

Remove the air conditioning

filter from the filter case and

replace it with a new one.

The “UP” marks shown on

the filter and the filter case

should be pointing up.

433

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the system

When using the air conditioning system, make sure that a filter is always

installed.

When cleaning the filter, do not clean the filter with water.

434

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Electronic key battery

435

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.

You will need the following items:

Flathead screwdriver

Small Phillips-head screwdriver

Lithium battery (CR1632)

Replacing the battery

Take out the mechanical key.

Remove the cover.

Remove the depleted battery.

Insert a new battery with the

“+” terminal facing up.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

436

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

If the electronic key battery is discharged

The following symptoms may occur.

The smart entry & start system and wireless remote control will not

function properly.

The operational range is reduced.

Use a CR1632 lithium battery

Batteries can be purchased at any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional, jewelers, or camera

stores.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by any

authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.

When the card key battery needs to be replaced (if equipped)

The battery for the card key is available only at Lexus dealers. Your Lexus

dealer can replace the battery for you.

CAUTION

Removed battery and other parts

Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child,

they can cause choking. Failure to do so could result in death or serious

injury.

Certification for the smart entry & start system

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCOR-

RECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE

INSTRUCTIONS.

437

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

NOTICE

For normal operation after replacing the battery

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.

Always work with dry hands.

Moisture may cause the battery to rust.

Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.

Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

438

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Checking and replacing fuses

If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have

blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.

Engine compartment (type B fuse box): Remove the

engine compartment cover. (P. 407)

Open the fuse box cover.

Engine compartment (type A fuse box: Left-hand drive vehi-

cles)

Push the tabs in and lift the

lid off.

Engine compartment (type A fuse box: Right-hand drive vehi-

cles)

Push the tabs in and lift the

lid off.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

439

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Engine compartment (type B fuse box)

Push the tabs in and lift the

lid off.

Driver’s side instrument panel

Remove the lid.

Passenger’s side instrument panel

Remove the lid.

After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage

ratings” (P. 442) for details about which fuse to check.

STEP 4

440

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Remove the fuse with the

pull-out tool.

Check if the fuse has blown.

Type A

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Replace it with one of an

appropriate amperage rating.

The amperage rating can be

found on the fuse box lid.

Type B

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Replace it with one of an

appropriate amperage rating.

The amperage rating can be

found on the fuse box lid.

STEP 5

STEP 6

441

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Removing the front controller (engine compartment: type B fuse

box)

Lift the lid off while pushing

the tabs on either side.

Type C

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Contact any authorized

Lexus dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

Type D

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Contact any authorized

Lexus dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

442

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Fuse layout and amperage ratings

Engine compartment (type A fuse box)

Left-hand drive vehicles

Right-hand drive vehicles

Fuse Ampere Circuit

1PWR HTR 25 A Power heater

2TURN-HAZ 15 A Emergency flashers, turn signals

3IG2 MAIN 20 A IG2, IGN, GAUGE

4RAD NO.2 30 A Audio

5D/C CUT 20 A DOME, MPX-B

6RAD NO.1 30 A

443

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

7MPX-B 10 A

Headlights, front fog lights, front

position lights, license plate lights,

windshield washer, horn, power

door lock system, power windows,

power seats, electric tilt and tele-

scopic steering column, meter,

smart entry & start system, outside

rear view mirrors, air conditioning

system, multiplex communication

system

8DOME 10 A Interior lights, meter, outer foot

lights

9CDS 10 A Electric cooling fans

10 E/G-B 60 A FR CTRL-B, ETCS, A/F, STR

LOCK, EDU, ECD

11 DIESEL GLW 80 A Engine glow system

12 ABS1 50 A VDIM

13 RH J/B-B 30 A FR DOOR RH, RR DOOR RH,

AM2

14 MAIN 30 A H-LP L LWR, H-LP R LWR

15 STARTER 30 A Smart entry & start system

16 LH J/B-B 30 A FR DOOR LH, RR DOOR LH,

SECURITY

17 P/I-B 60 A

EFI, F/PMP, INJ

18 EPS 80 A Power steering

Fuse Ampere Circuit

444

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

19 ALT 150 A

LH J/B-AM, E/G-AM, GLW

PLG2, HEATER, FAN1, FAN2,

DEFOG, ABS2, RH J/B-AM,

GLW PLG1,

LH JB-B, RH J/B-B

20 GLW PLG1 50 A PTC heater

21 RH J/B-AM 80 A

OBD, STOP SW, TI&TE, FR P/

SEAT RH, RAD NO.3, ECU-IG

RH,

RH-IG, FR S/HTR RH, ACC, CIG,

PWR OUTLET, DOOR DL

22 ABS2 30 A VDIM

23 DEFOG 50 A Rear window defogger

24 FAN2 40 A Electric cooling fans

25 FAN1 40 A Air conditioning system

26 HEATER 50 A Air conditioning system

27 GLW PLG2 50 A PTC heater

28 E/G-AM 60 A H-LP CLN, FR CTRL-AM,

DEICER, A/C COMP

29 LH J/B-AM 80 A

S/ROOF, FR P/SEAT LH, TV

NO.1,

A/C, FUEL OPEN, PSB, RR FOG,

FR WIP, H-LP LVL, LH-IG,

ECU-IG LH, PANEL, TAIL, TV

NO.2, MIR HTR, FR S/HTR LH

Fuse Ampere Circuit

445

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Engine compartment (type B fuse box)

IS250

IS220d and IS200d

Fuse Ampere Circuit

1SPARE 30 A Spare fuse

2SPARE 25 A Spare fuse

3SPARE 10 A Spare fuse

4FR CTRL-B 25 A H-LP UPR, HORN

446

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

5A/F 15 A

Multiport fuel injection system/

sequential multiport fuel injection

system

6ETCS 10 A

Multiport fuel injection system/

sequential multiport fuel injection

system

7TEL 10 A

8STR LOCK 25 A Steering lock system

9H-LP CLN 30 A Headlight cleaner

10 A/C COMP 7.5 A Air conditioning system

11 DEICER 25 A Windshield wiper de-icer

12 FR CTRL-AM 30 A FR TAIL, FR FOG, WASHER

13 IG2 10 A Ignition system

14 EFI NO.2 10 A

Multiport fuel injection system/

sequential multiport fuel injection

system

15 H-LP R LWR 15 A Headlight low beam (right)

16 H-LP L LWR 15 A Headlight low beam (left)

17 F/PMP 25 A Fuel system

18 EFI 25 A

Multiport fuel injection system/

sequential multiport fuel injection

system, EFI NO.2

19 INJ 20 A

Multiport fuel injection system/

sequential multiport fuel injection

system

20 H-LP UPR 20 A Headlight high beams

21 HORN 10 A Horns

Fuse Ampere Circuit

447

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

22 WASHER 20 A Windshield washer

23 FR TAIL 10 A Front position lights

24 FR FOG 15 A Front fog lights

25 EDU 20 A Starter system

26 ECD 25 A Starter system, fuel system, multi-

plex communication system, ECD

NO.2

27 ECD NO.2 10 A

Starter system, fuel system,

exhaust system,

multiport fuel

injection system/ sequential multi-

port fuel injection system

Fuse Ampere Circuit

448

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Left side instrument panel

Fuse Ampere Circuit

1FR P/SEAT LH 30 A Power seat

2A/C 7.5 A Air conditioning system

3MIR HTR 15 A Outside rear view mirror defoggers

4TV NO.1 10 A Display

5FUEL OPEN 10 A Fuel filler door opener

6TV NO.2 7.5 A Lexus parking assist monitor

7PSB 30 A Pre-crash seat belt

8S/ROOF 25 A Moon roof

9TAIL 10 A Tail lights, license plate lights,

manual headlight leveling system

10 PANEL 7.5 A Switch illumination, air condition-

ing system, display, audio, power

heater

11 RR FOG 7.5 A Rear fog lights

12 ECU-IG LH 10 A

Air conditioning system, cruise

control, power steering, rain sen-

sor, anti-glare inside rear view mir-

ror, shift lock system, moon roof,

VSC, windshield wiper, Lexus

parking assist-sensor

13 FR S/HTR LH 15 A Seat heaters and ventilators

14 RR DOOR LH 20 A Power windows

449

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

15 FR DOOR LH 20 A Power windows, outside rear view

mirror

16 SECURITY 7.5 A Smart entry & start system

17 H-LP LVL 7.5 A Automatic headlight leveling sys-

tem

18 LH-IG 10 A

Charging system, headlight

cleaner, rear window defogger,

electric cooling fans, emergency

flashers, turn signal lights, back-up

lights, stop lights, outside rear

view mirror defoggers, seat belts,

Lexus parking assist-sensor, cruise

control, PTC heater, rear sunshade,

exhaust system

19 FR WIP 30 A Windshield wipers

Fuse Ampere Circuit

450

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Right side instrument panel

Fuse Ampere Circuit

1FR P/SEAT RH 30 A Power seat

2DOOR DL 15 A Power door lock system

3OBD 7.5 A On-board diagnosis system

4STOP SW 7.5 A

Stop lights, multiport fuel injection

system/sequential multiport fuel

injection system, VDIM, shift lock

system, high mounted stop light

5TI & TE 20 A Electric tilt and telescopic steering

column, multiplex communication

system

6RAD NO.3 10 A Audio

7GAUGE 7.5 A Meter

8IGN 10 A

SRS airbag system, steering lock

system, multiport fuel injection

system/sequential multiport fuel

injection system, stop lights

451

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

9ACC 7.5 A

Clock, audio, navigation system,

outside rear view mirrors, smart

entry & start system, Lexus park-

ing assist monitor, glove box light,

console box light, multiplex com-

munication system, display

10 CIG 15 A Cigarette lighter

11 PWR OUTLET 15 A Power outlet

12 RR DOOR RH 20 A Power windows

13 FR DOOR RH 20 A Power windows, outside rear view

mirrors, multiplex communication

system

14 AM2 7.5 A Smart entry & start system

15 RH-IG 7.5 A

Seat belts, automatic transmis-

sion, seat heaters and ventilators,

windshield wiper de-icer, power

heater

16 FR S/HTR RH 15 A Seat heaters and ventilators

17 ECU-IG RH 10 A

Power seat, headlights, front fog

lights, front position lights, license

plate lights, windshield washer,

outside rear view mirror, VDIM,

air conditioning system, pre-crash

seat belt, electric tilt and telescopic

steering column, power windows,

navigation system, vehicle stabil-

ity control, multiplex communica-

tion system, smart entry & start

system

Fuse Ampere Circuit

452

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

After a fuse is replaced

If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb

may need replacement. (P. 453)

If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by any

authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

If there is an overload in the circuits

The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.

CAUTION

To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.

Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any

other object in place of a fuse.

Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.

Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.

This can cause extensive damage or even fire.

Do not modify the fuses or the fuse box.

NOTICE

Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by any autho-

rized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-

fessional, as soon as possible.

453

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Light bulbs

You may replace the following bulbs yourself. For more information

about replacing other light bulbs, contact any authorized Lexus dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

Preparing a replacement light bulb

Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (P. 552)

Removing the engine compartment cover

P. 407

Front bulb locations

Headlight low beam

(halogen bulb)

Front position

Headlight high

454

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Replacing light bulbs

Headlight low beams (vehicles with halogen bulbs)

Release the lock and remove

the cover.

Turn the bulb base counter-

clockwise.

Rear bulb locations

Rear fog light

Rear turn signal

Back-up light

STEP 1

STEP 2

455

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Unplug the connector while

pulling the lock release.

Headlight high beams (vehicles with halogen headlights)

Release the lock and remove

the cover.

Turn the bulb base counter-

clockwise.

Unplug the connector while

depressing the lock release.

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

456

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Headlight high beams (vehicles with discharge headlights)

Turn the cover counterclock-

wise and remove it.

Turn the bulb base counter-

clockwise.

Unplug the connector while

pulling the lock release.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

457

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Front position lights (vehicles with halogen headlights)

Release the lock and remove

the cover.

Turn the bulb base counter-

clockwise.

Remove the light bulb.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

458

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Back-up lights and rear fog lights

Open the trunk door and

remove the trunk panel cover

clips.

Partly remove the trunk panel

cover and turn the bulb bases

counterclockwise.

Rear fog light

Back-up light

Remove the light bulb.

Rear fog light

Back-up light

Rear turn signal lights

Open the trunk door and

remove the cover.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

459

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Turn the bulb base counter-

clockwise.

Remove the light bulb.

Bulbs other than the above

If any of the bulbs listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by

any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-

fied and equipped professional.

Headlight high and low beams (discharge bulbs)

Front fog lights

Front turn signal lights

Side turn signal lights

Stop/tail lights

Tail lights

High mounted stoplight

License plate lights

Daytime running lights

Front position lights (vehicles with discharge headlights)

STEP 2

STEP 3

460

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IS250/220d/200d_EE

When replacing the front left headlight and front position light bulbs

Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens

Contact any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional, for more information in the following situations.

Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does

not indicate a malfunction.

Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.

Water has built up inside the headlight.

Discharge headlights (if equipped)

If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on,

or may go out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal

power is restored.

LED side turn signal lights, tail lights, stop/tail lights, high mounted stop-

light, license plate lights and front position lights (vehicles with discharge

headlights)

The side turn signal lights, tail lights, stop/tail lights, high mounted stop-

light, license plate lights and front position lights (vehicles with discharge

headlights) consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take

your vehicle to any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional to have the light replaced.

Remove the securing bolt and move the

washer fluid filler opening to allow easy

access to the light bulbs.

After replacing the bulbs, make sure to

secure the washer fluid filler opening

with the bolt.

461

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Replacing light bulbs

Turn off the headlights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately

after turning off the headlights.

The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.

Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the

bulb by the plastic or metal portion.

If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.

Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so

may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This

may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.

Discharge headlights (if equipped)

Contact any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional, before replacing discharge headlights (includ-

ing light bulbs).

Do not touch the high-intensity discharge headlight’s high voltage socket

when the headlights are turned on.

An extremely high voltage of 20000 V will be discharged and could result

in serious injury or death by electric shock.

Do not attempt to take apart or repair the low beam discharge headlight

bulbs, connectors, power supply circuits, or related components.

Doing so could result in electric shock and serious injury or death.

To prevent damage or fire

Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.

When trouble arises

457

5-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers.......... 458

If your vehicle needs to

be towed......................... 459

If you think something is

wrong............................. 465

Fuel pump shut off

system ............................ 466

5-2. Steps to take in an

emergency

If a warning light turns

on or a warning buzzer

sounds... ......................... 467

If a warning message is

displayed........................ 473

If you have a flat tire

(vehicles with a spare

tire)................................. 485

If you have a flat tire

(vehicles with an

emergency tire

puncture repair kit) ........ 497

If the engine will not start 512

If the shift lever cannot

be shifted from P............ 514

If you lose your keys........ 515

If the electronic key

does not operate

properly.......................... 516

If the vehicle battery is

discharged...................... 521

If your vehicle overheats . 525

If you run out of fuel

and the engine stalls....... 528

If the vehicle becomes

stuck............................... 529

If your vehicle has to

be stopped in an

emergency...................... 531

458

IS250/220d/200d_EE

5-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers

NOTICE

To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the

engine is not running.

Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is involved

in an accident.

Press the switch to flash all

the turn signal lights. To turn

them off, press the switch

once again.

459

5-1. Essential information

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

If your vehicle needs to be towed

Before towing

The following may indicate a problem with your transmission.

Contact any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional, before towing.

The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move.

The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.

Emergency towing

If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may

be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emer-

gency towing eyelet(s). This should only be attempted on hard,

surfaced roads for short distances at low speeds.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The

vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in

good condition.

If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by

any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional, such as a commercial towing service, using a

lift-type truck or a flat bed truck.

Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provin-

cial and local laws.

If towing from the rear, the vehicle's front wheels and axles must be in

good condition. (P. 463)

If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.

460

5-1. Essential information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Towing eyelets

Emergency towing procedure

Release the parking brake.

Shift the shift lever to N.

Put the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY mode

or IGNITION ON mode.

CAUTION

Caution while towing

Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.

Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive

stress on the emergency towing eyelets and the cables or chains. Always

be cautious of the surroundings and other vehicles while towing.

If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering

will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.

NOTICE

To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission

(vehicles with an automatic transmission)

Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.

This may cause serious damage to the transmission.

When towing a vehicle without using a towing dolly

(vehicles with a manual transmission)

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch must not be OFF.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

461

5-1. Essential information

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Installing towing eyelets

Remove the eyelet cover using

a flathead screwdriver.

To protect the bodywork, place

a rag between the screwdriver

and the vehicle body, as shown

in the illustration.

Insert the towing eyelet into the

hole and tighten partially by

hand.

Tighten down the towing eyelet

securely using a wheel nut

wrench.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Location of the emergency towing eyelet

P. 485

462

5-1. Essential information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Towing with a sling-type truck

CAUTION

Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle

Make sure that towing eyelets are installed securely.

If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing. This

may lead to accidents that cause serious injury or even death.

NOTICE

To prevent body damage

Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.

463

5-1. Essential information

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Towing with a wheel lift-type truck

From the front

Vehicles with an automatic

transmission: Use a towing

dolly under the rear wheels.

Vehicles with a manual trans-

mission: We recommend to use

a towing dolly under the rear

wheels.

When not using a towing dolly,

release the parking brake and

shift the shift lever to N.

From the rear

Switch to ACCESSORY mode

so that the steering wheel is

unlocked.

NOTICE

To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission

(vehicles with an automatic transmission)

Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.

464

5-1. Essential information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Using a flat bed truck

If your Lexus is transported by

a flat bed truck, it should be

tied down at the locations

shown in the illustration.

If you use chains or cables to tie

down your vehicle, the angles

shaded in black must be 45.

Do not overly tighten the tie

downs or the vehicle may be

damaged.

NOTICE

To prevent damaging the vehicle

Do not tow the vehicle from the rear with the “ENGINE START STOP”

switch OFF.

The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels

straight.

When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at

the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the

vehicle could be damaged while being towed from the rear.

465

5-1. Essential information

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

If you think something is wrong

If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably

needs adjustment or repair. Contact any authorized Lexus dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional, as soon

as possible.

Visible symptoms

Fluid leaks under the vehicle

(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is nor-

mal.)

Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear

Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points

higher than normal

Audible symptoms

Changes in exhaust sound

Excessive tire squeal when cornering

Strange noises related to the suspension system

Pinging or other noises related to the engine

Operational symptoms

Engine missing, stumbling or running rough

Appreciable loss of power

Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking

Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level

road

466

5-1. Essential information

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Fuel pump shut off system (IS250 only)

NOTICE

Before starting the engine

Inspect the ground under the vehicle.

If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been

damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.

To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an air-

bag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops sup-

plying fuel to the engine.

Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system

is activated.

Turn “ENGINE START STOP” switch to the ACCES-

SORY mode or OFF.

Restart the engine.

STEP 1

STEP 2

467

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...

Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be danger-

ous.

The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake

system. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact

any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional.

*:Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:

P. 477

Warning

lights Warning light/Details

Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*

• Low brake fluid

• Malfunction in the brake booster system

This light also comes on when the parking brake is not

released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is

fully released the system is operating normally.

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn

on or flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does

not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.

468

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Stop the vehicle immediately.

The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the

vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle

in a safe place and contact any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer,

or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

Have the vehicle inspected immediately.

Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead

to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.

Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional,

immediately.

Warning light Warning light/Details

Charging system warning light

Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.

Warning light Warning light/Details

Malfunction indicator lamp

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The electronic engine control system;

• The electronic throttle control system;

• The electronic automatic transmission control system.

SRS warning light

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The SRS airbag system;

• The seat belt pretensioner system.

ABS warning light

Indicates a malfunction in:

•The ABS;

• The brake assist system.

469

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Electric power steering warning light

Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steer-

ing) system.

Pre-crash safety system warning light (if equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the pre-crash safety system.

The warning light will operate as follows, even when the

system is not malfunctioning:

• The light will flash quickly when the system is operat-

ing.

(P. 230)

• The light will flash when the pre-crash braking is dis-

abled. (P. 231)

• The light will flash when the system cannot temporarily

be used. (P. 477)

Slip indicator

Indicates a malfunction in:

•The VSC system;

•The TRC system; or

• The hill-start assist control system

Fuel filter warning light (vehicles with a manual transmis-

sion)

Indicates that the amount of accumulated water in the

fuel filter has reached the specified level.

Warning light Warning light/Details

470

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Follow the correction procedures.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,

check that the warning light turns off.

Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure

Open door warning light

(warning buzzer)*1

Indicates that a door or the

trunk is not fully closed.

Check that all doors and the

trunk are closed.

Low fuel level warning

light

Remaining fuel

(Approximately 11 L

[2.9 gal., 2.4 Imp. gal.] or

less)

Refuel the vehicle.

(On the

instrument

cluster)

Driver’s seat belt

reminder light

(warning buzzer)*2

Warns the driver to fasten

his/her seat belt.

Fasten the seat belt.

(On the center

panel)

Front passenger’s seat belt

reminder light

(warning buzzer)*2

Warns the front passenger

to fasten his or her seat

belt.

Fasten the seat belt.

471

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Master warning light

A buzzer sounds and the

warning light comes on

and flashes to indicate that

the master warning sys-

tem has detected a mal-

function.

P. 474

Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure

472

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

*1:Open door warning buzzer:

P. 477

*2:Driver's and front passenger’s seat belt reminders:

The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the

driver and front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The

buzzer sounds for 30 seconds after the vehicle has reached a speed of at

least 20 km/h (12 mph). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the

buzzer will sound in a different tone for 90 more seconds.

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving

The malfunction indicator lamp will come on if the fuel tank becomes com-

pletely empty. If the fuel tank is empty, refuel the vehicle immediately. The

malfunction indicator lamp will go off after several trips.

If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off, contact any authorized

Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional as soon as possible.

Electric power steering warning light

When the battery is low or when the voltage drops temporarily, the electric

power steering warning light may come on.

Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder and

warning buzzer

If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger

detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning

buzzer to sound, even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.

If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger,

and the warning light may not operate properly.

473

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

When the electric power steering warning light comes on

The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.

If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, firmly

hold and operate it using more force than usual.

NOTICE

If the fuel filter warning light comes on (vehicles with a manual transmis-

sion)

Never drive the vehicle with the warning light on. Continued driving with

water accumulated in the fuel filter will damage the fuel injection pump.

474

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

If a warning message is displayed

If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and

perform the following actions:

Left-hand drive vehicles

Master warning light

The master warning light also

comes on or flashes in order

to indicate that a message is

currently being displayed on

the multi-information dis-

play.

Multi-information display

Right-hand drive vehicles

Master warning light

The master warning light also

comes on or flashes in order

to indicate that a message is

currently being displayed on

the multi-information dis-

play.

Multi-information display

If any of the warning lights turns on again after performing the

following actions, contact any authorized Lexus dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

475

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Stop the vehicle immediately.

A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-

information display. The following warning indicates the possibil-

ity of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immedi-

ately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact any authorized

Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional.

Have the vehicle inspected immediately.

A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-

information display. Failing to investigate the cause of the follow-

ing warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and

possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by any

authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional, immediately.

Warning message Details

(Flashing)

Indicates an abnormal engine oil pressure.

The warning light may turn on if the engine oil

pressure is too low.

Warning message Details

(Flashing)

Indicates a malfunction in the steering lock sys-

tem.

476

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the pre-crash safety

system.

(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the automatic headlight

leveling system

(If equipped)

Indicates a Lexus parking assist-sensor malfunc-

tion.

The malfunctioning assist-sensor is shown flash-

ing on the display.

(Flashing)

(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the dynamic radar

cruise control system.

Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate

the system, and then press the button again to

reactivate the system.

Warning message Details

477

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Follow the correction procedures.

A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-

information display. After taking the specified steps to correct the

suspected problem, check that the warning message turns off.

Warning message Details Correction procedure

Indicates that one or

more of the doors is not

fully closed.

The system also indi-

cates which doors are

not fully closed.

flashes and a

buzzer sounds to indi-

cate that one or more

of the doors is not

fully closed (with the

vehicle having reached

a speed of 5 km/h [3

mph]).

Make sure that all of the

doors are closed.

Indicates that the hood

is not fully closed.

flashes and a

buzzer sounds to indi-

cate that hood is not

fully closed (with the

vehicle having reached

a speed of 5 km/h [3

mph]).

Close the hood.

478

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Indicates that the trunk

is not fully closed.

flashes and a

buzzer sounds to indi-

cate that trunk is not

fully closed (with the

vehicle having reached

a speed of 5 km/h [3

mph]).

Close the trunk.

(Flashing)

(If equipped)

Indicates that the moon

roof is not fully closed

(with the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch

OFF and the driver's

door opened).

Close the moon roof.

Indicates that the park-

ing brake is still

engaged.

flashes and a

buzzer sounds to indi-

cate that the parking

brake is still engaged

(with the vehicle hav-

ing reached a speed of

5 km/h [3 mph]).

Release the parking

brake.

Warning message Details Correction procedure

479

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Indicates that the

washer fluid level is

low. Add washer fluid.

Indicates that engine oil

level is low.

Check the level of

engine oil, and add if

necessary.

This message may

appear if the vehicle is

stopped on a slope.

Move the vehicle to a

level surface and

check to see if the

message disappears.

(IS220d and IS200d)

Indicates that the engine

oil and oil filter should

be changed.

Check and change the

engine oil and oil filter

by any authorized

Lexus dealer or repairer,

or another duly quali-

fied and equipped pro-

fessional.

(Flashing)

(If equipped)

Indicates that the pre-

crash safety system is

not currently functional.

• Clean the grille and

the sensor.

• Wait until the pre-

crash safety system

cools down.

Warning message Details Correction procedure

480

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

(If equipped)

Indicates that Lexus

parking assist-sensor is

dirty or covered with

ice.

Clean the sensor.

(Flashing)

(If equipped)

Indicates that the

dynamic radar cruise

control sensor is dirty or

covered with ice.

Clean the sensor.

(Flashing and then

continuously on)

(Flashing)

(If equipped)

Indicates that the

dynamic radar cruise

control system is unable

to judge vehicle-to-

vehicle distance.

• Switch the driving

mode to either the nor-

mal or power mode.

• If the windshield wip-

ers are on, turn them

off or set them to

either the intermittent

or the slow mode.

(Flashing)

(If equipped)

Indicates that your vehi-

cle is nearing the vehi-

cle ahead (in dynamic

radar cruise mode).

Slow the vehicle by

applying the brakes.

Warning message Details Correction procedure

481

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

(Flashing)

(If equipped)

Indicates that there is a

high possibility of a

frontal collision, or that

the pre-crash braking

function is operating.

Slow the vehicle by

applying the brakes.

(On some IS250

models)

Indicates that the fuel

injectors require main-

tenance.

Have your Lexus dealer

replenish the injector

cleaner and reset the

message.

Warning messages in the radar cruise mode (if equipped)

In the following instances, there is a possibility that the approach warning

will not illuminate even when vehicle-to-vehicle distance is closing.

When the speed of the vehicle ahead matches or exceeds your vehicle’s

speed.

When the vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely slow speed.

Immediately after the cruise control speed has been set.

At the instant the accelerator is applied.

Warning message Details Correction procedure

482

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Follow the correction procedures.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,

check that the warning light turns off.

Inte-

rior

buzzer

Exte-

rior

buzzer

Warning message Details Correction

procedure

Once (Comes on for 10 sec-

onds.)

(Flashing)

Indicates that an

attempt was

made to start the

engine without

the electronic

key being pres-

ent, or the elec-

tronic key was

not functioning

normally.

Start the engine

with the elec-

tronic key

present. *

Once

times

(Flashing)

Indicates that a

door other than

the driver’s door

has been opened

or closed with

the “ENGINE

START STOP”

switch in any

mode other than

OFF and the

electronic key

outside of the

detection area.

Confirm the

location of the

electronic key.

483

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Once

times

(Vehicles with an

automatic transmis-

sion)

(Flashing)

Indicates that

the driver’s door

has been opened

or closed with

the shift lever in

P, the “ENGINE

START STOP”

switch in any

mode other than

OFF and the

electronic key

outside of the

detection area.

Turn the

“ENGINE

START STOP”

switch OFF or

confirm the

location of the

electronic key.

Once Con-

tinu-

ous (Displayed alter-

nately)

(Vehicles with an

automatic transmis-

sion)

(Flashing)

Indicates that

the driver’s door

has been opened

or closed (with

the shift lever

out of in P, the

“ENGINE

START STOP”

switch in any

mode other than

OFF and the

electronic key

outside of the

detection area).

• Shift the shift

lever to P.

• Confirm the

location of the

electronic key.

Inte-

rior

buzzer

Exte-

rior

buzzer

Warning message Details Correction

procedure

484

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Once 

(Flashing)

Indicates that

the key battery

is low.

Replace the bat-

tery. (P. 435)

Once (Vehicles with an

automatic transmis-

sion)

Indicates that a

door has been

opened or closed

and the

“ENGINE

START STOP”

switch has been

turned twice to

ACCESSORY

mode with the

“ENGINE

START STOP”

switch OFF.

Press the

“ENGINE

START STOP”

switch while

applying the

brakes.

Once 

(Vehicles with a man-

ual transmission)

Indicates that a

door has been

opened or closed

and the

“ENGINE

START STOP”

switch has been

switched twice

to ACCES-

SORY mode

from OFF.

Press the

“ENGINE

START STOP”

switch while

depressing the

clutch pedal.

Inte-

rior

buzzer

Exte-

rior

buzzer

Warning message Details Correction

procedure

485

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

 

(Flashing)

Indicates that

the steering lock

has not released

within 3 seconds

of pressing the

“ENGINE

START STOP”

switch.

Press the

“ENGINE

START STOP”

switch again

while turning

the steering

wheel with the

brake pedal

depressed.

Once (Vehicles with an

automatic transmis-

sion) Indicates that

the electronic

key does not

operate properly.

P. 521

  (Vehicles with an

automatic transmis-

sion)

Inte-

rior

buzzer

Exte-

rior

buzzer

Warning message Details Correction

procedure

486

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

*: If the engine does not start when the electronic key is inside the vehicle,

the electronic key battery may be depleted or there may be difficulties

receiving the signal from the key. (P. 42)

Once 

(Vehicles with a man-

ual transmission) Indicates that

the electronic

key does not

operate properly.

P. 522

 

(Vehicles with a man-

ual transmission)

Inte-

rior

buzzer

Exte-

rior

buzzer

Warning message Details Correction

procedure

487

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

If you have a flat tire (vehicles with a spare tire)

Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.

Before jacking up the vehicle

Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.

Set the parking brake.

Shift the shift lever to P (vehicles with an automatic trans-

mission) or R (vehicles with a manual transmission).

Stop the engine.

Turn on the emergency flashers.

Location of the spare tire, jack and tools

With a compact spare tire

Jack

Jack handle

Tighte Loosen

Spare tire

Tool bag

(including towing eye-

488

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Taking out the spare tire (with a compact spare tire)

Remove the luggage tray.

Loosen the center fastener that

secures the spare tire.

With a full-size spare tire

Tool bag

(including towing eye- Spare tire

Tool bag

(jack handle)

Jack

Tighte Loosen

489

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Taking out the spare tire (with a full-size spare tire)

Lift up the hook of the panel on

the trunk floor.

Secure the panel using the hook

provided.

Loosen the center fastener that

secures the spare tire.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

490

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Replacing a flat tire

Chock the tires.

Slightly loosen the wheel nuts

(one turn).

Turn the tire jack portion “A”

by hand until the notch of the

jack is in contact with the jack

point.

STEP 1

Flat tire Wheel

chock posi-

Front

Left-

hand

side

Behind the

rear right-

hand side

Right-

hand

side

Behind the

rear left-

hand side

Rear

Left-

hand

side

In front of

the front

right-hand

Right-

hand

side

In front of

the front

left-hand

STEP 2

STEP 3

491

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Raise the vehicle until the tire is

slightly raised off the ground.

Remove all the wheel nuts and

the tire.

When resting the tire on the

ground, place the tire so that the

wheel design faces up to avoid

scratching the wheel surface.

STEP 4

STEP 5

492

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Installing the spare tire

Remove any dirt or foreign

matter from the wheel contact

surface.

If foreign matter is on the wheel

contact surface, the wheel nuts

may loosen while the vehicle is

in motion, and the tire may

come off the vehicle.

Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by

hand by approximately the same amount.

Vehicles with a compact spare tire

Tighten the nuts until the

tapered portion comes into

loose contact with the disc

wheel seat.

Vehicles with a full-size spare tire

Turn the nuts until the washers

come into contact with the

wheel.

STEP 1

STEP 2

Tapered portion

Disc wheel

seat

Washer

Wheel nut

Disc wheel

493

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Lower the vehicle.

Firmly tighten each nut two or

three times in the order shown

in the illustration.

Tightening torque:

103 N•m (10.5 kgf•m, 76 ft•lbf)

Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

494

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

The compact spare tire

The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE

ONLY” on the tire sidewall.

Use the compact spare tire temporarily only in an emergency.

Make sure to check the tire pressure of the compact spare tire. (P. 548)

If you have a flat rear tire on a road covered with snow or ice (vehicles with

a compact spare tire)

Install the compact spare tire on the front of the vehicle. Perform the follow-

ing steps and fit tire chains to the rear tires.

Replace a front tire with the compact spare tire.

Replace the flat rear tire with the tire removed from the front of the

vehicle.

Fit tire chains to the rear tires.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

495

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Certification for the jack

496

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Using the tire jack

Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to the

vehicle suddenly falling off the jack.

Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or

installing and removing tire chains.

Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.

Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replac-

ing tires on this vehicle.

Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.

Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack.

Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.

Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.

When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.

Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the

tire.

Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.

Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one work-

ing on or near the vehicle may be injured.

Replacing a flat tire

Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the

wheel while the vehicle is moving.

Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen

and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.

• Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened,

leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can

cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a

serious accident. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or

wheel nuts.

• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 103 N•m (10.5

kgf•m, 76 ft•lbf) as soon as possible after changing wheels.

497

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

When using the compact spare tire or directional spare tire

Remember that your spare tire is specifically designed for use with your

vehicle. Do not use your spare tire on another vehicle.

Do not use more than one spare tires simultaneously.

Replace the spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.

Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp cor-

nering.

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 80 km/h (50 mph) when a compact

spare tire is installed on the vehicle.

The spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing to observe

this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

Speed limit when using the compact spare tire

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 80 km/h (50 mph) when a compact spare

tire is installed on the vehicle.

The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing to

observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious

injury.

When installing a directional tire

Install it on the correct side of the vehicle. If installed on the wrong side of

the vehicle, tire performance will be affected, possibly leading to an acci-

dent. If it is necessary to install a directional spare tire on the wrong side of

the vehicle, use it only temporarily and observe all the precautions listed for

operation with a compact spare tire.

498

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

When the compact spare tire is attached

The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems

may not operate correctly:

ABS & Brake assist

VSC

TRC

EPS

VDIM

Navigation system (if equipped)

Lexus parking assist-sensor (if equipped)

Dynamic radar cruise control (if equipped)

Cruise control (if equipped)

PCS (if equipped)

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire.

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.

Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the

wheel beyond repair.

Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on

the vehicle.

The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire com-

pared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over

uneven road surfaces.

Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire

Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.

Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving per-

formance.

499

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

If you have a flat tire (vehicles with an emergency tire puncture repair kit)

A puncture caused by a nail or screw passing through the tire tread can

be repaired temporarily using the emergency tire puncture repair kit.

(The kit contains a bottle of sealant. The sealant can be used only once

to temporarily repair one tire without removing the nail or screw from

the tire.) After temporarily repairing the tire with the kit, have the tire

repaired or replaced by any authorized Lexus dealer, tire dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

Before repairing the tire

Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.

Set the parking brake.

Shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or N

(manual transmission).

Stop the engine.

Turn on the emergency flashers.

500

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Location of the emergency tire puncture repair kit, jack and

tools

Jack*

(if

Jack handle

(if

Tool bag

(including

towing eye-

Emergency tire

puncture

repair kit

501

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Emergency tire puncture repair kit components

Bottle

Air pressure

Compressor

Hose

Stickers

Air release cap

Power plug

Insertion key

502

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Taking out the emergency tire puncture repair kit

Lift up the hook of the panel on

the trunk floor.

Secure the panel using the hook

provided.

Take out the emergency tire puncture repair kit.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

503

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Before performing emergency repair

Check the degree of the tire damage.

A tire should only be repaired

with the emergency tire punc-

ture repair kit if the damage is

caused by a nail or screw pass-

ing through the tire tread.

• Do not remove the nail or screw

from the tire. Removing the

object may widen the opening

and disenable emergency repair

with the kit.

• To avoid sealant leakage, move

the vehicle until the area of the

puncture, if known, is posi-

tioned at the top of the tire.

504

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Emergency repair method

Pull the insertion key out of the

kit.

Place the kit with the bottom

facing upward.

Peel off the label, and push in

the insertion key until a click is

heard.

Return the kit to an upright

position and make sure that the

compressor switch is off.

Use the kit with the top facing

upward.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

505

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Connect the power plug to the

power outlet socket. (P. 370)

Remove the valve cap from the

valve of the punctured tire.

Remove the air release cap

from the hose.

Connect the hose to the valve.

Screw the end of the hose

clockwise as far as possible.

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

STEP 7

506

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Check the specified tire infla-

tion pressure.

Tire inflation pressure is speci-

fied on the label on the driver's

side pillar as shown. (P. 548)

Start the engine.

To inject the sealant and inflate

the tire, turn the compressor

switch on.

Use the kit with the top facing

upward.

STEP 8

STEP 9

STEP 10

507

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Inflate the tire until the recom-

mended pressure is reached.

The sealant will be injected

and the pressure will spike to

300 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm2 or bar,

44 psi) or 450 kPa (4.5 kgf/

cm2 or bar, 65 psi), then

gradually decrease.

The air pressure gauge will

display the actual tire infla-

tion pressure about 1 minute

after the switch is turned on.

• Turn the compressor switch off

and then check the tire inflation

pressure. Being careful not to

over inflate, check and repeat

the inflation procedure until the

recommended tire inflation

pressure is reached.

• If the needle of the air pressure

gauge reaches the red zone (450

kPa [4.5 kgf/cm2 or bar, 65 psi]

or more), there may be a mal-

function in the tire or in the kit

itself. Stop operation immedi-

ately.

• If the tire inflation pressure is

still lower than the recom-

mended level after inflating for

10 minutes with the switch on,

the tire is too damaged to be

repaired. Turn the compressor

switch off and contact any

authorized Lexus dealer, tire

dealer or repairer, or another

STEP 11

508

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

duly qualified and equipped

professional.

509

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

• If the tire inflation pressure

exceeds the recommended

level, let out some air to adjust

the tire inflation pressure. (P.

512)

Disconnect the hose from the valve on the tire and then pull

out the power plug from the power outlet socket.

To spread the liquid sealant evenly within the tire, immedi-

ately drive for about 5 km (3 miles).

After driving for about 5 km (3

miles), stop your vehicle in a

safe place on a hard, flat surface

and reconnect the compressor.

Turn the compressor switch on

and wait for several seconds,

then turn it off. Check the tire

inflation pressure.

If the tire inflation pressure is

below 130 kPa (1.3 kgf/cm2

or bar, 19 psi): The puncture

cannot be repaired. Contact

any authorized Lexus dealer,

tire dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

If the tire inflation pressure is

between 130 kPa (1.3 kgf/

cm2 or bar, 19 psi) and a

point below the recom-

mended level: The tire can be

STEP 12

STEP 13

STEP 14

STEP 15

510

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

repaired. Proceed to “STEP

16”.

If the tire inflation pressure is

at the recommended level:

Proceed to “STEP 17”.

Turn the compressor switch on to inflate the tire until the

recommended tire inflation pressure is reached. Drive for

about 5 km (3 miles) and then perform “STEP 14”.

Store the kit and then attach the

2 stickers as shown.

Taking precautions to avoid

sudden braking and sharp turns,

drive carefully at under 80 km/h

(50 mph) to the nearest autho-

rized Lexus dealer, tire dealer or

repairer, or another duly quali-

fied and equipped professional

for tire repair or replacement.

STEP 16

STEP 17

511

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

In the following cases, the tire cannot be repaired with the emergency tire

puncture repair kit. Contact any authorized Lexus dealer, tire dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

When the tire is damaged due to driving without sufficient air pressure

When the tire lost air pressure due to a crack or damage in the tire side-

wall

When the tire is visibly separated from the wheel

When the cut or damage to the tread is 4 mm (0.16 in.) long or more

When the wheel is damaged

When two or more tires have been punctured

When there is more than one hole or cut in the damaged tire

Emergency tire puncture repair kit

The sealant has a limited lifespan. The expiry date is marked on the bot-

tle. The sealant should be replaced before the expiry date. Contact any

authorized Lexus dealer, tire dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional for replacement.

The sealant stored in the emergency tire puncture repair kit can be used

only once to temporarily repair a single tire. If the sealant in the bottle

and other parts of the kit have been used and need to be replaced, contact

any authorized Lexus dealer, tire dealer or repairer, or another duly qual-

ified and equipped professional.

The sealant can be used when the outside temperature is from -30C (-

22F) to 60C (140F).

The kit is exclusively designed for size and type of tires originally

installed on your vehicle. Do not use it for tires that are a different size

than the original ones, or for any other purpose.

If the sealant gets on your clothes, it may stain.

If the sealant adheres to a wheel or the surface of the vehicle body, the

stain may not be removable if it is not cleaned at once. Immediately wipe

away the sealant with a wet cloth.

During operation of the kit, a loud operation noise is produced. This does

not indicate a malfunction.

512

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

If the tire is inflated to more than the recommended level

Disconnect the hose from the valve.

Disconnect the hose from the valve, remove the air release cap

from the hose and then reconnect the hose.

Turn the compressor switch on and wait for several seconds, then

turn it off. Check that the air pressure indicator shows the recom-

mended level (P. 548).

If the air pressure is lower than the recommended level, turn the

compressor switch on again and repeat the inflation procedure until

the recommended pressure is reached.

CAUTION

Precautions for use of the sealant

Ingesting the sealant is hazardous to your health. If you ingest sealant,

consume as much water as possible, then immediately consult a doctor.

If sealant gets in eyes or adheres to skin, immediately wash it off with

water. If discomfort persists, consult a doctor.

STEP 1

Install the air release cap to the end of the

hose and push the protrusion on the air

release cap into the tire valve to let some

air out.

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

513

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

When fixing the flat tire

Stop your vehicle in a safe and flat area.

Connect the valve and hose securely with the tire installed on the vehicle.

If the hose is not properly connected to the valve, air leakage may occur or

sealant may be sprayed out.

If the hose comes off the valve while inflating the tire, there is a risk that

the hose will move abruptly due to air pressure.

After inflation of the tire has been completed, the sealant may splatter

when the hose is disconnected or some air is let out of the tire.

Keep back from the tire while it is being repaired, as there is a chance of it

bursting while the repair operation is being performed. If you notice any

cracks or deformation of the tire, turn off the compressor switch and stop

the repair operation immediately.

The kit may overheat if operated for a long period of time. Do not operate

the compressor continuously for more than 10 minutes.

Parts of the kit become hot during operation. Be careful handling the kit

during and after operation.

Do not attach the vehicle speed warning sticker to an area other than the

one indicated. If the sticker is attached to an area where an SRS airbag is

located, such as the pad of the steering wheel, it may prevent the SRS air-

bag from operating properly.

Driving to spread the liquid sealant evenly

Drive the vehicle carefully at a low speed. Be especially careful when

turning and cornering.

If the vehicle does not drive straight or you feel a pull through the steering

wheel, stop the vehicle and check the following:

• Tire condition. The tire may have separated from the wheel.

• Tire inflation pressure. If tire inflation pressure is 130 kPa (1.3 kgf/

cm2 or bar, 19 psi) or below, this may indicate severe tire damage.

514

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.

Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the

wheel beyond repair.

When performing an emergency repair

Perform the emergency repair without removing the nail or screw that has

punctured the tread of the tire. If the object that has punctured the tire is

removed, repair by the emergency tire puncture repair kit may not be pos-

sible.

The kit is not waterproof. Make sure that the kit is not exposed to water,

such as when it is being used in the rain.

Do not put the kit directly onto dusty ground such as sand at the side of

the road. If the kit vacuums up dust etc., a malfunction may occur.

Use the kit with the top facing upward. The kit cannot work properly if it

is laid on its side.

Handling the emergency tire puncture repair kit

The compressor power source should be 12 V DC suitable for vehicle use.

Do not connect the compressor to any other source.

If gasoline splatters on the kit, the kit may deteriorate. Take care not to

allow gasoline to touch it.

Store the kit in its assigned place out of reach of children.

Do not disassemble or modify the kit. Do not subject parts such as the air

pressure indicator to impacts. This may cause a malfunction.

515

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

If the engine will not start

If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures are

being followed (P. 156), consider each of the following points.

The engine will not start even when the starter motor operates

normally.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem.

There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.

IS250: Refuel the vehicle.

IS220d and IS200d: P. 531

The engine may be flooded. (IS250)

Try to restart the engine once more following correct start-

ing procedures. (P. 156)

There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer sys-

tem.

(P. 96)

The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and

headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a

low volume.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem.

The battery may be discharged. (P. 524)

The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.

The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and

headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem.

One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.

The battery may be discharged. (P. 524)

There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.

Contact any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional, if the problem can-

516

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Emergency start function

When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as

an interim measure to start the engine if the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch is functioning normally:

Vehicles with an automatic transmission

Set the parking brake.

Put the shift lever in P.

Set the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY

mode.

Press and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for

about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.

Vehicles with a manual transmission

Set the parking brake.

Put the shift lever in N.

Set the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to the ACCES-

SORY mode.

Push and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for

about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal and

clutch pedal firmly.

Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system

may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by any autho-

rized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

517

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

: If equipped

If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there

may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent acci-

dental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by any

authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional, immediately.

The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure

that the shift lever can be shifted.

Set the parking brake.

Start the engine.

Depress the brake pedal.

Press the shift lock override

button.

The shift lever can be shifted

while the button is pressed.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

518

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

If you lose your keys

New genuine Lexus keys can be made by any authorized Lexus dealer

or repairer, and another duly qualified and equipped professional,

using the other key or the key number stamped on your key number

519

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

If the electronic key does not operate properly

Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk and key linked func-

tions

Use the mechanical key built in to the electronic keys to operate

the doors. (P. 33)

An alarm will sound if the alarm is set. ( P. 102)

Doors

Remove the cover on the

driver’s door handle.

Locks all doors

Closes the windows/moon

roof (turn and hold)

Unlocks all doors

Opens the windows/moon

roof (turn and hold)

If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is inter-

rupted (P. 42) or the electronic key cannot be used because the bat-

tery is depleted, the smart entry & start system and wireless remote

control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be

opened or the engine can be started by following the procedure below.

STEP 1

STEP 2

520

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

After the operation is com-

pleted, reinstall the cover.

Hook the upper claw of the

cover onto the upper catch on

the vehicle side, and then push

on the lower side of the cover.

Make sure that the lower claw

of the cover is securely fastened

to the lower catch on the vehicle

side. If the cover is not securely

attached, it may fall off while

driving.

Trunk

Turn the mechanical key clock-

wise to open.

STEP 3

521

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes and starting the

engine

Automatic transmission

Shift the shift lever to P and apply the brakes.

Touch the Lexus emblem side

of the electronic key to the

“ENGINE START STOP”

switch.

An alarm will sound to indicate

that the start function cannot

detect the electronic key that is

touched to the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch if any of

the doors is opened and closed

while the key is touched to the

switch.

To change “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes: Within

10 seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal

and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. Modes can

be changed each time the switch is pressed.

(P. 158)

To start the engine: Press the “ENGINE START STOP”

switch within 10 seconds after the buzzer sounds, keeping

the brake pedal depressed.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

522

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Manual transmission

Shift the shift lever to N and depress the clutch pedal.

Touch the Lexus emblem side

of the electronic key to the

“ENGINE START STOP”

switch.

An alarm will sound to indicate

that the start function cannot

detect the electronic key that is

touched to the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch if any of

the doors is opened and closed

while the key is touched to the

switch.

To change “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes: Within

10 seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the clutch pedal

and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. Modes can

be changed each time the switch is pressed. (P. 158)

To start the engine: Press the “ENGINE START STOP”

switch within 10 seconds after the buzzer sounds, keeping

the clutch pedal depressed.

In the event that the engine still cannot be started, contact any

authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

523

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Stopping the engine

For vehicles with an automatic transmission: Shift the shift lever to P and

press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as you normally do when stop-

ping the engine.

For vehicles with a manual transmission: Shift the shift lever to N position

and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as you normally do when

stopping the engine.

Replacing the key battery

As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the

electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery depletes.

(P. 435)

Alarm

Using the mechanical key to lock the doors will not set the alarm system.

If a door is unlocked using the mechanical key when the alarm system is set,

the alarm may be triggered.

524

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

If the vehicle battery is discharged

The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehi-

cle's battery is discharged.

You can call any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional.

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second

vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Lexus

following the steps below.

Remove the engine compartment covers. (P. 407)

Connecting the jumper cables

Left-hand vehicles

STEP 1

STEP 2

525

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Right-hand vehicles

Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle

Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle

Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle

Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown

in the illustration.

Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the

engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for

approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of your

vehicle.

Open and close any of the doors with the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch OFF.

Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and turn

the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON

mode, then start the vehicle's engine.

Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper

cables in the exact reverse order in which they were con-

nected.

Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at any autho-

rized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

526

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Avoiding a discharged battery

Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.

Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is run-

ning at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.

Charging the battery

The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when

the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects

of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the

battery may discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The bat-

tery recharges automatically during driving.)

CAUTION

Avoiding battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flam-

mable gas that may be emitted from the battery.

Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it

is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended ter-

minal.

Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-”

terminals.

Do not allow open flame or use matches, cigarette lighters or smoke near

the battery.

527

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

Battery precautions

The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while

related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following pre-

cautions when handling the battery.

When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care

not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, cloth-

ing or the vehicle body.

Do not lean over the battery.

In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes,

immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.

Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention

can be received.

Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and

other battery-related parts.

Do not allow children near the battery.

NOTICE

To prevent damaging the vehicle

Do not pull- or push-start the vehicle, because the three-way catalytic con-

verter (IS250), catalytic converter and DPNR (Diesel Particulate-NOx

Reduction System) catalytic converter (IS220d) or catalytic converter and

DPF (Diesel Particulate Filter System) catalytic converter (IS200d) may

overheat and become a fire hazard.

When handling jumper cables

Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan

or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.

528

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

If your vehicle overheats

If your engine overheats:

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the automatic

air conditioning system.

Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.

If you see steam:

Stop the engine. Carefully lift the hood after the steam

subsides and then restart the engine.

If you do not see steam:

Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.

Check to see if the cooling fans are operating.

If the fans are operating:

Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the

instrument cluster) begins to fall and then stop the

engine.

If the fans are not operating:

Stop the engine and call any authorized Lexus dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-

fessional.

After the engine has cooled

down sufficiently, check the

engine coolant level and

inspect the radiator core

(radiator) for any leaks.

If the engine compartment

cover needs to be removed:

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

529

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Overheating

If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating.

The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of

power is experienced.

Steam is coming from under the hood.

CAUTION

To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your

vehicle

If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until

the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, caus-

ing serious injury such as burns.

Keep hands and clothing away from the fans and other belts while the

engine is running.

Do not loosen the radiator cap (IS250), or the coolant reservoir cap

(IS220d and IS200d) while the engine and radiator are hot.

Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam

released under pressure.

Add engine coolant if neces-

sary.

Water can be used in an

emergency if engine coolant

is unavailable. (P. 544)

Have the vehicle checked at the nearest authorized Lexus dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional,

as soon as possible.

STEP 5

530

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

NOTICE

When adding engine coolant

Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.

When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too

quickly can cause damage to the engine.

531

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

If you run out of fuel and the engine stalls (IS220d and IS200d)

NOTICE

When restarting the engine

Do not crank the engine before refueling and priming the fuel system. This

may damage the engine and fuel system.

If you run out of fuel and the engine dies:

Refuel your vehicle.

Prime the fuel system by

using the satellite switches.

Push “” or “” to select prim-

ing operation mode. ( )

Press the “ON/OFF” button to

select “ON”. ( )

The priming operation will

start.

Wait for 1 minute and start the engine. (P. 156)

The priming operation will automatically stop when the engine

starts.

If the engine does not start after the above steps performed,

wait for 10 seconds and try step 2 and step 3 again. If the

engine still does not start, contact any authorized Lexus dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional.

fihidhl dllihl

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

532

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

If the vehicle becomes stuck

CAUTION

When attempting to free a stuck vehicle

If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the sur-

rounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons.

The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes

free. Use extreme caution.

When shifting the shift lever

With automatic transmission vehicles, be careful not to shift the shift lever

with the accelerator pedal depressed.

This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may

cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle

becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.

Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift

lever to P (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or N

(vehicles with a manual transmission).

Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck

tire.

Place wood, stones or some other material to help pro-

vide traction under the tires.

Restart the engine.

Shift the shift lever to the D or R position (vehicles with

an automatic transmission) or 1 or R position (vehicles

with a manual transmission), release the parking brake

and carefully apply the accelerator to free the vehicle.

Turn off TRC and VSC if these functions are hampering

fhhil( )

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

533

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

NOTICE

To avoid damaging the transmission and other components

Avoid spinning the wheels and do not rev the engine.

If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may

require towing to be freed.

534

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency

Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the

vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following proce-

dure:

Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly

depress it.

Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase

the effort required to slow the vehicle.

Shift the shift lever to N.

If the shift lever is shifted to N

After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by

the road.

Stop the engine.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N

Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce

vehicle speed as much as possible.

Stop the engine by pressing

and holding the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch for 3

consecutive seconds or more.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 3

Press and hold for 3 seconds or

STEP 4

535

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

IS250/220d/200d_EE

CAUTION

If the engine has to be turned off while driving

Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake

pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as

much as possible before turning off the engine.

536

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Vehicle specifications

533

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data

(fuel, oil level, etc.)........ 534

Fuel information .............. 553

6-2. Customization

Customizable features...... 556

534

IS250/220d/200d_EE

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)

Dimensions and weight

Overall length 4585 mm (180.5 in.)

Overall width 1800 mm (70.9 in.)

Overall height*1

IS250

1425 mm (56.1 in.) *2

1440 mm (56.7 in.)*3

IS220d and IS200d

1425 mm (56.1 in.) *4

1440 mm (56.7 in.)*5

Wheelbase 2730 mm (107.4 in.)

Tread

Front 1535 mm (60.4 in.)

Rear 1525 mm (60 in.)*4

1535 mm (60.4 in.) *5

Gross vehicle mass

IS250

2045 kg (4508 lb.)

IS220d and IS200d

2075 kg (4575 lb.)

Maximum permis-

sible axle capacity

Front

IS250

1070 kg (2359 lb.)

IS220d and IS200d

1090 kg (2403 lb.)

Rear 1150 kg (2535 lb.)

Drawbar load 70 kg (154.4 lb.)

Towing capacity

with

brake 1500 kg (3307 lb.)

without

brake 560 kg (1235 lb.)

535

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifica-

IS250/220d/200d_EE

*1:Unladen vehicle

*2:Except in Turkey, Ukraine, Kazakhstan and Belarus (except 18-inch

tires)

*3:In Turkey, Ukraine, Kazakhstan and Belarus (18-inch tires)

*4:Models with 18-inch tires

*5:Models with 16-inch or 17-inch tires

Vehicle identification

Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for

your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your

Lexus. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.

This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel or in

the engine compartment.

This number is also on the man-

ufacturer’s label.

536

6-1. Specifications

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Engine number

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.

IS250

IS220d and IS200d

537

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifica-

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Engine

Model 4GR-FSE 2AD-FHV, 2AD-FTV

Type 6-cylinder V type,

4-cycle, gasoline

4 cylinder in line, 4

cycle, diesel

(with turbocharger)

Bore and stroke 83.0  77.0 mm

(3.27 3.03 in.) 86.0  96.0 mm

(3.39 3.78 in.)

Displacement 2500 cm3

(152.5 cu.in.) 2231 cm3

(136.1 cu.in.)

Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment

538

6-1. Specifications

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Fuel

IS250

IS220d and IS200d

Fuel type

EU area:

Unleaded gasoline conforming to European stan-

dard EN228 only

Except EU area:

Unleaded gasoline only

Research octane num-

ber 95 or higher

Fuel tank capacity

(Reference) 65 L (17.2 gal., 14.3 Imp. gal.)

Fuel type

EU area:

Diesel fuel conforming to European standard

EN590

Except EU area:

Diesel fuel that contains 50 ppm or less of sulfur

Cetane number 48 or higher

Fuel tank capacity

(Reference) 65 L (17.2 gal., 14.3 Imp. gal.)

539

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifica-

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Lubrication system

IS250

*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing

the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 min-

utes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.

Engine oil selection

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Lexus

recommends the use of approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil”.

Another motor oil of matching quality can also be used.

Oil grade:

0W-20, 5W-20, 5W-30 and 10W-30:

API grade SL “Energy-Conserving”, SM “Energy-Conserving”,

SN “Resource-Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil

15W-40 and 20W-50:

API grade SL, SM or SN multigrade engine oil

Oil capacity

(Drain and refill 

reference*)

With filter

Without filter 6.3 L (6.6 qt., 5.5 Imp. qt.)

5.9 L (6.2 qt., 5.2 Imp. qt.)

540

6-1. Specifications

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Recommended viscosity (SAE):

SAE 0W-20 is filled into your

Lexus vehicle at manufactur-

ing, and the best choice for

good fuel economy and good

starting in cold weather.

If SAE 0W-20 oil is not avail-

able, SAE 5W-30 oil may be

used. However, it should be

replaced with SAE 0W-20 at

the next oil change.

If you use SAE 10W-30 or a

higher viscosity engine oil in

extremely low temperatures,

the engine may become diffi-

cult to start, so SAE 5W-30 or

lower viscosity engine oil is

recommended.

Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):

• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which

allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow

for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.

• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil

when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity

(one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is oper-

ated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.

Temperature range anticipated

before next oil change.

Preferred

541

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifica-

IS250/220d/200d_EE

How to read oil container labels:

Either or both API registered marks are added to some oil contain-

ers to help you select the oil you should use.

API Service Symbol

Top portion: The oil quality des-

ignation by API (American

Petroleum Institute) (SN)

Center portion: The SAE vis-

cosity grade (SAE 0W-20)

Lower portion: “Resource-Con-

serving” means that the oil has

fuel saving and environmental

protection.

ILSAC Certification Mark

The ILSAC (International

Lubricant Standardization and

Approval Committee) Certifica-

tion Mark is displayed on the

front of the container.

542

6-1. Specifications

IS250/220d/200d_EE

IS220d and IS200d

*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing

the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 min-

utes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.

Engine oil selection

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Lexus

recommends the use of approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil”.

Another motor oil of matching quality can also be used.

Oil grade: ACEA C2

Oil capacity

(Drain and refill 

reference*)

With filter

Without filter 6.0 L (6.3 qt., 5.3 Imp. qt.)

5.2 L (5.5 qt., 4.6 Imp. qt.)

NOTICE

Using engine oil other than ACEA C2 may damage the catalytic converter.

543

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifica-

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Recommended viscosity (SAE):

SAE 0W-30 is filled into your

Lexus vehicle at manufactur-

ing, and the best choice for

good fuel economy and good

starting in cold weather.

Oil viscosity (0W-30 is explained here as an example):

• The 0W in 0W-30 indicates the characteristic of the oil which

allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow

for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.

• The 30 in 0W-30 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil

when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity

(one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is oper-

ated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.

Temperature range anticipated

before next oil change.

544

6-1. Specifications

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Cooling system

Ignition system (IS250 only)

Capacity

IS250

10.3 L (10.9 qt., 9.1 Imp. qt.)

IS220d (without power heater)

8.8 L (9.3 qt., 7.7 Imp. qt.)

IS200d (without power heater)

8.7 L (9.2 qt., 7.7 Imp. qt.)

IS220d and IS200d (with power heater)

9.0 L (9.5 qt., 7.9 Imp. qt.)

Coolant type

Use either of the following.

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based

non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-

borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic

acid technology

Do not use plain water alone.

Spark plug

Make

Gap DENSO FK20HBR11

1.1 mm (0.043 in.)

NOTICE

Iridium-tipped spark plugs

Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning the

engine.

545

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifica-

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Electrical system

Differential

*: Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil”

at the factory. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear

Oil” or an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specifica-

tion. Please contact any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional for further details.

Battery

Specific gravity reading at

20C (68F): 1.250  1.290 Fully charged

1.160  1.200 Half charged

1.060  1.100 Discharged

Charging rates

Quick charge

Slow charge 15 A max.

5 A max.

Oil capacity

IS250

1.15 L (1.20 qt., 1.01 Imp. qt.)

IS220d and IS200d

1.35 L (1.42 qt., 1.19 Imp. qt.)

Oil type and viscosity* Toyota Genuine Differential Gear

Oil LT 75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent

546

6-1. Specifications

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Automatic transmission

*: The fluid capacity is provided as a reference.

If replacement is necessary, contact any authorized Lexus dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

Manual transmission

Clutch

Fluid capacity* 7.5 L (7.9 qt., 6.6 Imp. qt.)

Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS

NOTICE

Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS”

may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission

accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission

of your vehicle.

Gear oil capacity 1.8 L (1.9 qt., 1.6 Imp. qt.)

Gear oil type API GL-5

Recommended gear oil viscos-

ity SAE75W-90

Clutch free play 5  15 mm (0.2  0.6 in.)

Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

547

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifica-

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Brakes

*1:Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 490 N (50

kgf, 110 lbf) while the engine is running.

*2:Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 300 N (30.6

kgf, 67.4 lbf).

*3:Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 200 N (20.4

kgf, 45.0 lbf).

Steering

Pedal clearance *1

IS250

Right-hand drive

Left-hand drive

IS220d and IS200d

Right-hand drive

Left-hand drive

104.0 mm (4.1 in.) Min.

108.0 mm (4.3 in.) Min.

103.0 mm (4.1 in.) Min.

Pedal free play 1.0  2.0 mm (0.04  0.08 in.)

Parking brake pedal travel *2/

lever travel *3

Pedal type

Lever type 7  9 clicks

5  7 clicks

Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3

Free play Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

548

6-1. Specifications

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Tires and wheels

Tires and wheels (except for compact spare)

Type A

Tire size 205/55R16 89W

Tire inflation pressure

(front and rear)

(Recommended cold tire

inflation pressure)

Vehicle

speed Front wheel

kPa (kgf/cm2

or bar, psi)

Rear wheel

kPa (kgf/cm2

or bar, psi)

More than

210 km/h

(132 mph) 310 (3.1, 45) 330 (3.3, 48)

From 160 km/

h (100 mph)

to 210km/h

(132 mph)

290 (2.9, 42) 310 (3.1, 45)

160 km/h

(100 mph) or

less 240 (2.4, 35) 260 (2.6, 38)

Wheel size 16  7 JJ

Wheel nut torque 103 N•m (10.5 kgf•m, 76 ft•lbf)

549

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifica-

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Type B

Tire size Front tires: 225/45R17 90W

Rear tires: 245/45R17 95W

Tire inflation pressure

(front and rear)

(Recommended cold tire

inflation pressure)

Vehicle

speed Front wheel

kPa (kgf/cm2

or bar, psi)

Rear wheel

kPa (kgf/cm2

or bar, psi)

More than

210 km/h

(132 mph) 300 (3.0, 44) 320 (3.2, 46)

From 160 km/

h (100 mph)

to 210km/h

(132 mph)

280 (2.8, 41) 300 (3.0, 44)

160 km/h

(100 mph) or

less 240 (2.4, 35) 260 (2.6, 38)

Wheel size 17  8 J

Wheel nut torque 103 N•m (10.5 kgf•m, 76 ft•lbf)

550

6-1. Specifications

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Type C

Tire size Front tires: 225/40R18 88Y

Rear tires: 255/40R18 95Y

Tire inflation pressure

(front and rear)

(Recommended cold tire

inflation pressure)

Vehicle

speed Front wheel

kPa (kgf/cm2

or bar, psi)

Rear wheel

kPa (kgf/cm2

or bar, psi)

More than

210 km/h

(132 mph) 320 (3.2, 46) 340 (3.4, 49)

From 160 km/

h (100 mph)

to 210km/h

(132 mph)

300 (3.0, 44) 320 (3.2, 46)

160 km/h

(100 mph) or

less

IS250

240 (2.4, 35)

IS220d

and IS200d

260 (2.6, 38)

IS250

260 (2.6, 38)

IS220d

and IS200d

280 (2.8, 41)

Wheel size Front wheels: 18  8J

Rear wheels: 18 8 1/2 J

Wheel nut torque 103 N•m (10.5 kgf•m, 76 ft•lbf)

551

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifica-

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Compact spare tire (if equipped)

Tire size

Type A

T125/70D17 98M

Type B

T145/70D17 106M

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire infla-

tion pressure) 420 kPa (4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar, 60 psi)

Wheel size 17  4T

When towing a trailer

Add 20.0 kPa (0.2 kgf/cm2 or bar, 3 psi) to the recommended tire inflation

pressure, and drive at speeds below 100 km/h (62 mph).

552

6-1. Specifications

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Light bulbs

A: D4S discharge bulbs B: H11 halogen bulbs

C: Wedge base bulbs (amber) D: HB3 halogen bulbs

E: Wedge base bulbs (clear) F: Double end bulbs

Light bulbs WType

Exterior

Headlights

High beam

Low/high beam (discharge bulbs)

Low beam (halogen bulbs)

Front turn signal lights 21 C

Front position lights (with halogen

headlights) 5 E

Front fog lights 55 B

Rear turn signal lights 21 C

Back-up lights 16 E

Rear fog lights 21 E

Outer foot lights 5 E

Interior

Vanity lights 8 E

Trunk light 5 F

Interior lights

Front

Rear 5

Overhead courtesy lights

Front

Rear 3.8

Front door courtesy lights 5 E

553

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifica-

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Fuel information

IS250

EU area:

Your vehicle must use only

unleaded gasoline conforming to

European standard EN228.

For optimum engine perfor-

mance, select unleaded gasoline

with a Research Octane Number

of 95 or higher.

Except EU area:

Your vehicle must use only

unleaded gasoline.

For optimum engine perfor-

mance, select unleaded gasoline

with a Research Octane Number

of 95 or higher.

IS220d and IS200d

EU area:

Your vehicle must use only diesel

fuel conforming to European

standard EN590.

Except EU area:

Your vehicle must use only diesel

fuel that contains 50 ppm or less

of sulfur and has a cetane number

of 48 or higher.

554

6-1. Specifications

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline (IS250)

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Lexus has a fuel tank opening that

only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.

If you plan to drive in foreign countries (IS220d and IS200d)

Low sulphur diesel fuel may not be available, so please confirm the avail-

ability with your distributor.

If premium gasoline is not available (IS250)

If this premium type cannot be obtained, you can temporarily use unleaded

gasoline with a Research Octane Number as low as 91.

If your engine knocks

Consult any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-

fied and equipped professional.

You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accel-

erating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

555

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifica-

IS250/220d/200d_EE

556

6-1. Specifications

IS250/220d/200d_EE

NOTICE

557

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifica-

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Notice on fuel quality

Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine will be

damaged.

Do not use leaded gasoline.

Leaded gasoline will cause the three-way catalytic converter to lose its

effectiveness and the emission control system to function improperly.

Notice on diesel fuel quality (IS220d and IS200d)

Do not use a fuel that contains more than 50 ppm of sulfur.

Use of such a high sulfur fuel may damage the engine.

IS250 (EU area): Bioethanol fuel sold under names such as “E50” or

“E85” and fuel containing a large amount of ethanol should not be used.

The use of these fuels will damage the vehicle's fuel system. In case of

any doubt, ask any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional.

IS250 (except EU area): Bioethanol fuel sold under names such as “E50”

or “E85” and fuel containing a large amount of ethanol should not be

used. Your vehicle can use gasoline mixed with 10% max ethanol. The

use of fuel with more than 10% ethanol content (E10) will damage the

vehicle’s fuel system. You must ensure that refueling is carried out only

from a source where fuel specification and quality can be guaranteed. In

case of any doubt, ask any authorized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional.

IS220d and IS200d (EU area): FAME (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) fuel sold

under names such as “B30” or “B100” and fuel containing a large amount

of FAME should not be used. The use of these fuels will damage the vehi-

cle's fuel system. In case of any doubt, ask any authorized Lexus dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

IS220d and IS200d (except EU area): FAME (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester)

fuel sold under names such as “B30” or “B100” and fuel containing a

large amount of FAME should not be used. Your vehicle can use diesel

mixed with 5% max biodiesel FAME (B5). The use of fuel with more than

5% FAME content (B5) will damage the vehicle’s fuel system. You must

ensure that refueling is carried out only from a source where fuel specifi-

cation and quality can be guaranteed. In case of any doubt, ask any autho-

rized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional.

556

IS250/220d/200d_EE

6-2. Customization

Customizable features

Item Function Default setting Customized

setting

Smart entry

& start sys-

tem

(P. 37)

Operation signal

(Emergency flashers) On Off

Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be per-

sonalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences

requires specialized equipment and may be performed by any autho-

rized Lexus dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional.

Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other func-

tions being customized. Contact any authorized Lexus dealer or

557

6-2. Customization

Vehicle specifica-

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Wireless

remote con-

trol

(P. 55)

Unlocking operation All doors

unlocked in

one step

Driver's door

unlocked in

one step, all

doors

unlocked in

two steps

Time elapsed before

automatic door lock

function is activated if

door is not opened after

being unlocked

30 seconds

60 seconds

120 seconds

Operation signal

(Emergency flashers) On Off

Door lock buzzer On Off

Trunk unlocking func-

tion On Off

Trunk unlocking opera-

tion Push and hold Push twice

One short push

Item Function Default setting Customized

setting

558

6-2. Customization

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Door lock

(P. 58)

Speed-detecting auto-

matic door lock func-

tion On Off

Opening driver's door

unlocks all doors

On*1Off*1

Off*2On*2

Shifting gears to P

unlocks all doors*3Off On

Shifting gears to a posi-

tion other than P locks

all doors*3Off On

Unlocking using a key All doors

unlocked in

one step.

Driver's door

unlocked in

one step, all

doors

unlocked in

two steps

Steering

wheel

(P. 80) Auto tilt-away function On Off

Power win-

dows

(P. 85)

Linked door key opera-

tion Open and close

Off

Open only

Close only

Wireless remote con-

trol linked operation Off

Open only

Close only

Open and close

Linked entry function On Off

Item Function Default setting Customized

setting

559

6-2. Customization

Vehicle specifica-

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Moon roof

(P. 89)

Linked door key opera-

tion Open and close

Off

Open only

Close only

Linked operation of

components when door

key is used Slide only Tilt only

Wireless remote con-

trol linked operation*4 Off

Close only

Open only

Open and close

Linked operation of

components when wire-

less remote control is

used

Slide only Tilt only

Automatic

light control

system

(P. 186)

Light sensor sensitivity Level 3 Level 1 to 5

Lexus park-

ing assist-

sensor

(P. 217)

Back sensor operation

display and buzzer On Off

Buzzer volume Level 3 Level 1 to 5

Distance which a sensor

detects 150 cm (4.9 ft.) 60 cm (2.0 ft.)

Item Function Default setting Customized

setting

560

6-2. Customization

IS250/220d/200d_EE

*1:Except for Reunion

*2:For Reunion

*3:Vehicles with an automatic transmission only

*4:This function cannot be customized unless power window operation

using the wireless remote control is enabled.

Windshield

wipers and

washer

(P. 191)

Switching operation

when the vehicle is sta-

tionary On Off

Drip prevention func-

tion On Off

Time elapsed before the

drip prevention func-

tion operates

Var ia ble

depending on

the vehicle

speed

3 seconds

Illumination

(P. 351)

Time elapsed before

lights turn off 15 seconds 7.5 seconds

30 seconds

Operation when the

doors are unlocked On Off

Operation after the

“ENGINE START

STOP” switch is turned

OFF

On Off

Front footwell lights On Off

Shift lever light On Off

Outer foot light On Off

Item Function Default setting Customized

setting

561

6-2. Customization

Vehicle specifica-

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Index

561

Abbreviation list....................... 562

Alphabetical index.................... 563

What to do if... ......................... 574

For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the

“Navigation System Owner’s Manual” for informa-

tion regarding the equipment listed below.

• Navigation system

• Audio/video system

• Air conditioning

• Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogging

• Climate control

• Lexus parking assist-sensor

562

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Abbreviation list

Abbreviation/Acronym list

ABBREVIA-

TIONS MEANING

ABS Anti-lock Brake System

AI-SHIFT Artificial Intelligence Shift

CRS Child Restraint System

DISP Display

DPF Diesel Particulate Filter system

DPNR Diesel Particulate-NOx Reduction System

DRL Daytime Running Light

ECT Electronic Controlled Transmission

ELR Emergency Locking Retractor

EPS Electric Power Steering

LED Light Emitting Diode

PCS Pre-Crash Safety

SRS Supplemental Restraint System

TRC Traction Control

VDIM Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management

VIN Vehicle Identification Number

VSC Vehicle Stability Control

563

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Alphabetical index

A/C* ..........................................254

ABS...........................................224

Air conditioning filter ...............430

Air conditioning system

Air conditioning filter...........430

Automatic air conditioning

system*...............................254

Airbags

Airbag manual ON/OFF

system.................................140

Airbag operating conditions .112

Airbag precautions for your

child....................................116

Airbag warning light ............468

Curtain shield airbag operating

conditions...........................112

Curtain shield airbag

precautions .........................116

General airbag precautions...116

Locations of airbags .............110

Modification and disposal of

airbags................................120

Proper driving posture..108, 116

Side airbag operating

conditions...........................112

Side airbag precautions.........116

SRS airbags ..........................110

Alarm.........................................102

Antenna* ...................................272

Anti-lock brake system .............224

Armrest..................................... 377

Ashtrays.................................... 368

Audio input*............................. 306

Audio system*

Antenna................................ 272

Audio input.......................... 306

AUX port............................. 306

Bluetooth® audio................. 308

CD player/changer............... 273

iPod...................................... 288

MP3/WMA disc................... 280

Optimal use.......................... 304

Portable music player .......... 306

Radio.................................... 269

Steering wheel audio switch 307

USB memory....................... 296

USB port.............................. 296

Automatic air conditioning

system* .................................. 254

Automatic headlight leveling

system .................................... 189

Automatic light control system 186

Automatic transmission

Automatic transmission....... 161

If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P.................... 517

S mode................................. 165

AUX adapter*........................... 306

Auxiliary box............................ 361

*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

564

Alphabetical index

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Back-up lights

Replacing light bulbs............453

Wattage.................................552

Battery

Checking...............................415

If the vehicle has a discharged

battery.................................524

Preparing and checking before

winter .................................239

Bluetooth® audio*.....................308

Bluetooth® phone*....................323

Bottle holders ............................360

Brake

Parking brake........................171

Brake assist................................224

Care

Exterior.................................388

Interior..................................392

Seat belts...............................393

Cargo hooks ..............................384

CD changer*..............................273

CD player* ................................273

Chains........................................239

Child restraint system

Baby seats, definition ...........121

Baby seats, installation.........130

Child seats, definition...........121

Child seats, installation.........130

Installing CRS with ISOFIX

rigid anchor ........................134

Installing CRS with seat belts ....

131

Installing CRS with top straps....

134

Junior seats, definition......... 121

Junior seats, installation....... 130

Child safety

Airbag precautions............... 116

Battery precautions...... 419, 527

Child restraint system.......... 121

Child-protectors..................... 59

How your child should wear

the seat belt.......................... 77

Installing child restraints ..... 130

Moon roof precautions........... 92

Power window lock switch.... 85

Power window precautions.... 88

Removed electronic key battery

precautions ........................ 436

Seat belt comfort guide.......... 75

Seat belt precautions.............. 77

Seat heater precautions 373, 376

Trunk precautions.................. 65

Child-protectors.......................... 59

Cigarette lighter........................ 369

Cleaning

Exterior................................ 388

Interior ................................. 392

Seat belts.............................. 393

Clock ........................................ 364

Coat hooks................................ 381

Condenser................................. 415

Console box.............................. 356

Cooling system

Engine overheating.............. 528

Cornering assist sensors ........... 217

565

Alphabetical index

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Cruise control

Cruise control .......................198

Dynamic radar cruise control .....

202

Cup holder.................................359

Curtain shield airbags................110

Customizable features...............556

Daytime running light system...188

Defogger*

Rear window.........................265

Side mirror............................265

Dimension .................................534

Display

Dynamic radar cruise control .....

202

Satellite switch mode............365

Trip information ...................182

Warning message..................474

Do-it-yourself maintenance.......398

Door courtesy lights

Door courtesy lights .............351

Wattage.................................552

Door pockets .............................360

Doors

Door lock....................37, 55, 58

Door windows ........................85

Double locking system .........101

Side mirrors............................84

Driver's seat belt reminder light 470

Driving

Correct posture .....................108

Procedures ............................142

Driving position memory ............66

Electric power steering............. 224

Electronic key

If your electronic key battery is

discharged ......................... 519

Emergency, in case of

If a warning message is

displayed ........................... 474

If the engine will not start.... 515

If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P.................... 517

If the vehicle has a discharged

battery................................ 524

If the warning buzzer sounds467

If the warning light turns on 467

If you have a flat tire ... 487, 499

If you lose your keys ........... 518

If you run out of fuel and

the engine stalls................. 531

If you think something is

wrong................................. 465

If your electronic key does not

operate properly ................ 519

If your vehicle becomes stuck ...

532

If your vehicle has to be

stopped in an emergency... 534

If your vehicle needs to be

towed................................. 459

If your vehicle overheats ..... 528

Emergency flashers

Switch.................................. 458

Emergency tire puncture

repair kit................................. 499

*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

566

Alphabetical index

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Engine

Compartment........................405

Engine switch .......................156

Hood .....................................402

How to start the engine.........156

Identification number ...........535

If the engine will not start.....515

If you run out of fuel and

the engine stalls..................531

Ignition switch......................156

Overheating ..........................528

Engine compartment cover........407

Engine coolant

Capacity................................544

Checking...............................413

Preparing and checking before

winter .................................239

Engine coolant temperature

gauge.......................................171

Engine immobilizer system.........96

Engine oil

Capacity................................539

Checking...............................409

Preparing and checking before

winter .................................239

EPS............................................224

First-aid kit storage belt............ 384

Floor mat .................................. 382

Fluid

Washer................................. 420

Fog lights

Replacing light bulbs........... 453

Switch.................................. 190

Wattage................................ 552

Footwell lights.......................... 351

Front fog lights

Replacing light bulbs........... 453

Switch.................................. 190

Wattage................................ 552

Front passenger's seat belt

reminder light......................... 470

Front position lights

Replacing light bulbs........... 453

Switch.................................. 186

Wattage................................ 552

Front seats

Adjustment............................. 63

Driving position memory....... 66

Front turn signal lights

Wattage................................ 552

Fuel

Capacity............................... 538

Fuel gauge............................ 171

Fuel pump shut off system... 466

Gas station information ....... 576

If you run out of fuel and

the engine stalls................. 531

Information.......................... 553

Refueling ............................... 92

567

Alphabetical index

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Fuel door .....................................92

Fuel filler door.............................92

Fuel pump shut off system ........466

Fuses..........................................438

Gas station information.............576

Gauges.......................................171

Glove box..................................355

Glove box light..........................356

Hazard lights

Switch...................................458

Head restraints

Adjusting ...............................71

Headlight cleaner.......................197

Headlights

Discharge headlight

precautions .........................461

Replacing light bulbs............453

Switch...................................186

Wattage.................................552

Heaters

Seat heaters...................371, 374

Side mirror............................265

Hill-start assist control ..............224

Hood..........................................402

Hooks

Cargo ....................................384

Coat ......................................381

Shopping bag........................384

Horn...........................................173

Identification

Engine.................................. 535

Vehicle................................. 535

Ignition switch.......................... 156

Illuminated entry system.......... 351

Indicator lights.......................... 177

Inside rear view mirror............... 82

Intercooler ................................ 415

Interior lights

Interior lights ....................... 351

Switch.................................. 353

Wattage................................ 552

Jack

Positioning a floor jack........ 403

Vehicle-equipped jack......... 487

Jack handle............................... 487

Keyless entry.............................. 55

Keys

Electronic key........................ 32

Engine switch ...................... 156

If you lose your keys ........... 518

If your electronic key battery is

discharged ......................... 519

Key number ........................... 32

Keyless entry ......................... 55

Keys....................................... 32

Mechanical key...................... 32

Wireless remote control key.. 55

568

Alphabetical index

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Light bulbs

Replacing..............................453

Wattage.................................552

Lights

Door courtesy light...............351

Emergency flasher switch.....458

Fog light switch....................190

Hazard light switch...............458

Headlights switch .................186

Interior light switch ..............353

Outer foot lights....................351

Overhead courtesy light........351

Personal light switch ............354

Replacing light bulbs............453

Scuff lights ...........................351

Shift lever light.....................351

Turn signal lever...................170

Vanity lights .........................363

Wattage.................................552

Maintenance

Do-it-yourself maintenance..398

Maintenance data..................534

Maintenance requirements....395

Manual headlight leveling dial..187

Manual transmission .................168

Meter

Instrument panel light control ....

172

Meters...................................171

Mirrors

Inside rear view mirror...........82

Side mirror heater.................265

Side mirrors............................84

Vanity mirrors ......................363

Moon roof................................... 89

MP3 disc*................................. 280

Multi-information display ........ 181

Odometer.................................. 171

Oil

Engine oil............................. 409

Opener

Fuel filler door....................... 92

Hood .................................... 402

Trunk ..................................... 63

Outer foot lights

Outer foot lights................... 351

Wattage................................ 552

Outside rear view mirrors

Adjusting and folding............ 84

Mirror position memory ........ 66

Outside temperature display..... 182

Overhead console ..................... 358

Overhead courtesy lights

Overhead courtesy lights ..... 351

Wattage................................ 552

Overheating, Engine................. 528

569

Alphabetical index

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Parking assist sensors................217

Parking brake ............................171

PCS............................................230

Personal lights

Switch...................................354

Pollen removal mode*...............258

Power heater..............................263

Power outlet ..............................370

Power windows ...........................85

Pre-crash safety system.............230

Radar cruise control ..................202

Radiator.....................................415

Radio* .......................................269

RDS*.........................................270

Rear fog lights

Replacing light bulbs............453

Switch...................................190

Wattage.................................552

Rear sunshade............................378

Rear turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs............453

Wattage.................................552

Rear window defogger* ............265

Replacing

Electronic key battery...........434

Fuses.....................................438

Light bulbs............................453

Scuff lights ............................... 351

Seat belts

Adjusting the seat belt ........... 74

Child restraint system

installation......................... 130

Cleaning and maintaining

the seat belts...................... 393

Emergency locking retractor . 76

How to wear your seat belt.... 74

How your child should wear

the seat belt.......................... 77

Pregnant women, proper seat

belt use ................................ 76

Reminder light..................... 470

Seat belt pretensioners........... 75

Seat heaters....................... 371, 374

Seat ventilators ......................... 374

Seats

Adjustment............................. 63

Adjustment precautions......... 65

Child seats/child restraint

system installation............. 130

Cleaning............................... 392

Driving position memory....... 66

Head restraint......................... 71

Properly sitting in the seat ... 108

Seat heaters.................. 371, 374

Ventilated seats.................... 374

*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

570

Alphabetical index

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Service reminder indicators ......177

Shift lever

Automatic transmission........161

If the shift lever cannot

be shifted from P................517

Manual transmission.............168

Shift lever light..........................351

Shift lock system.......................517

Shopping bag hooks ..................384

Side airbags...............................110

Side mirror

Adjusting and folding.............84

Mirror position memory .........66

Side turn signal lights

Wattage.................................552

Smart entry & start system

Entry function.........................37

Starting the engine................158

Spare tire

Inflation pressure..................548

Storage location....................487

Spark plug .................................544

Specifications ............................534

Speedometer

Speed indicator.....................171

Speedometer .........................171

Steering wheel

Audio switches* .................. 307

Steering wheel position

memory ............................... 66

Manual adjustment ................ 79

Power adjustment .................. 80

Storage feature.......................... 355

Stuck

If your vehicle becomes stuck ...

532

Sun visors ................................. 362

Sunshade

Rear...................................... 378

Roof ....................................... 90

Switch

Airbag manual ON/OFF...... 140

ECT switch.......................... 162

Emergency flasher switch.... 458

Engine switch ...................... 156

Fog light switch ................... 190

Hazard light switch.............. 458

Ignition switch..................... 156

Light switches...................... 186

Power door lock switch ......... 58

Power window switch............ 85

Satellite switches ................. 365

Transmission shift switches. 165

Window lock switch.............. 85

Wiper and washer................ 191

571

Alphabetical index

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Tachometer

Tacho indicator.....................171

Tachometer...........................171

Tail lights

Switch...................................186

Talk switch*..............................332

Telephone switch* ....................332

Theft deterrent system

Alarm....................................102

Double locking system .........101

Engine immobilizer system....96

Tire inflation pressure ...............426

Tires

Chains...................................239

Checking...............................421

Emergency tire puncture

repair kit.............................499

If you have a flat tire ....487, 499

Inflation pressure..................426

Replacing..............................487

Rotating tires ........................421

Size .......................................548

Snow tires.............................239

Tools..........................................487

Total load capacity ....................534

Towing

Emergency towing................459

Trailer towing.......................242

Traction control.........................224

Transmission shift switches ....163,

165

TRC .......................................... 224

Trip meter................................. 171

Trunk

Extending trunk space ......... 380

Opener ................................... 63

Trunk light

Trunk light............................. 64

Wattage................................ 552

Turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs........... 453

Switch.................................. 170

Wattage................................ 552

USB port*................................. 296

Vanity lights

Vanity lights ........................ 363

Wattage................................ 552

Vanity mirrors .......................... 363

VDIM ....................................... 224

Vehicle dynamics integrated

management........................... 224

Vehicle identification number.. 535

Vehicle stability control ........... 224

Ventilators ................................ 374

VSC .......................................... 224

*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

572

Alphabetical index

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Warning buzzers

Brake system ........................467

Open door ............................470

Seat belt reminder.................470

Warning lights

Anti-lock brake system.........468

Brake assist system...............468

Brake system ........................467

Charging system...................468

Electric power steering warning

light ....................................468

Electronic engine control

system.................................468

Fuel filter warning light........468

Low fuel level.......................470

Malfunction indicator lamp..468

Master warning light ............470

Open door.............................470

Pre-crash safety system ........468

Pretensioners ........................468

Seat belt reminder light ........470

SRS airbags ..........................468

Warning messages

Dynamic radar cruise

control ....................... 475, 477

Engine oil level.................... 477

Engine oil maintenance ....... 477

Engine oil pressure .............. 475

Hood .................................... 477

Lexus parking assist

sensor......................... 475, 477

Moon roof............................ 477

Open door ............................ 477

Parking brake....................... 477

Pre-crash safety system 475, 477

Smart entry & start system .. 482

Steering lock........................ 475

Trunk ................................... 477

Washer fluid ........................ 477

Washer

Checking.............................. 420

Preparing and checking

before winter ..................... 239

Switch.................................. 191

Washing and waxing ................ 388

Weight ...................................... 534

Wheels...................................... 428

Window glasses ......................... 85

Window lock switch................... 85

Windows

Power windows...................... 85

Rear window defogger......... 265

Washer................................. 191

573

Alphabetical index

IS250/220d/200d_EE

Windshield wipers.....................191

Windshield wiper de-icer ..........266

Wireless remote control key

Replacing the battery............434

WMA disc* ...............................280

*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

574

IS250/220d/200d_EE

What to do if...

A tire punctures

P. 487

P. 499 If you have a flat tire

The engine does not start

P. 515 If the engine will not start

P. 531 If you run out of fuel and the engine

stalls (IS220d and IS200d)

P. 96 Engine immobilizer system

P. 524 If the vehicle battery is discharged

The shift lever cannot be

moved out of P

P. 517

If the shift lever cannot be shifted

from P

The engine coolant tempera-

ture gauge enters the red zone

Steam can be seen coming

from under the hood

P. 528 If your vehicle overheats

The key is lost

P. 518 If you lose your keys

The battery runs out

P. 524 If the vehicle battery is discharged

The doors cannot be locked

P. 58 Doors

The horn begins to sound

P. 102 Alarm

The vehicle is stuck in mud or

sand

P. 532 If the vehicle becomes stuck

575

What to do if...

IS250/220d/200d_EE

A warning light or indicator

light comes on

P. 467 If the warning light turns on or a

warning buzzer sound...

Warning lights

P. 467 P. 470

P. 468 P. 470

P. 470 P. 470

P. 468 P. 468

P. 470 P. 468

P. 468 P. 468

Brake system warning

light

Driver’s seat belt

reminder light

ABS warning light

Front passenger’s seat

belt reminder light

Low fuel level warning

light

Master warning light

SRS warning light

Electric power steering

warning light

Open door warning light

Pre-crash safety system

warning light

Malfunction indicator

lamp

Fuel filter warning light

Charging system warn-

ing light

Slip indicator

A warning message is dis-

P. 474 If a warning message is displayed

576

IS250/220d/200d_EE

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Auxiliary catch lever

P. 402

Trunk opener

P. 63

Fuel filler door

P. 92

Hood lock release lever

P. 402

Fuel filler door opener

P. 92

Tire inflation pressure

P. 548

Fuel tank capacity

(Reference) 65 L (17.2 gal., 14.3 Imp. gal.)

Fuel type P. 94, 538

Cold tire inflation

pressure P. 548

Engine oil capacity

(Drain and refill 

reference)

L (qt., Imp.

qt.)

With filter IS250: 6.3 (6.6, 5.5)

IS220d and IS200d: 6.0 (6.3, 5.3)

Without filter IS250: 5.9 (6.2, 5.2)

IS220d and IS200d: 5.2 (5.5, 4.6)

Engine oil type Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent P. 539

Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

First, read the manual;
Check if your question has been asked previously;
Try to ask your question as clearly as possible;
Did you already try to solve the problem? Please mention this;
Is your problem solved by a visitor then let him/her know in this forum;
To give a response to a question or answer, do not use this form but click on the button 'reply to this question';
Your question will be posted here and emailed to our subscribers. Therefore, avoid filling in personal details.

new questions and answers
new manuals

You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.

Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Lexus IS 220d - 2005-2013 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 15.34 mb in size.

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.

Info

Lexus IS 220d - 2005-2013 Manual

Product: